giao an t anh 9

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Prepare : 15/8/10
<i>Teach: 8A- 16/8B-16</i>
Period 1 : consolidation

I. Aims: Students will be able to remind something about grade 7 and know how to learn
<i>well in the new school year . </i>

II. Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , boards ,,,,
III. Procedure :

1 / Revision :
* The tenses :
- Present simple
- Present progressive
- Simple future
- Near future
- Past simple

=> Ask Ss to repeat the uses and forms of each
tense

2/Practice

Change these sentences into other tenses ( Present
simple , Present progressive , near future , Simple
future and Past simple ) and add appropriate
adverbs of time .

1. She is in Grade 7

2. They are playing soccer
3. She went to Ha Noi last week
4. I will visit my sister next week
5. Mai is going to build a new house .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of
class .

- Give feedback

3/ Presenting the English Grade 8

- There are 16 units in this program , each unit has
6 parts Which mention a particular skill such as
Listening . Speaking , Reading and Writing

+ At the beginning of the unit is “ Getting started “
to lead in the new lesson or in order to warm up .
-Each unit has Language Focus which help Ss to
summarize basic knowledge they have learnt in
each one .

Introduce some books , reference books to students
4/ Preparation :

- Ask Ss to prepare Unit 1 “ Getting started +
Listen and read “

Listen and repeat the uses and
forms of them

Copy down

Work in pairs to practice changing
these sentences into other tenses .

Listen to the introduction

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

UNIT 1: MY frienDs
*Aims

Helping students:
- to introduce people

- to respond to introductions
- to describe people

- to write about themselves and about other people.
*LANGUAGE CONTENT

- Present simple to talk about general truths.
- Be (not) Adjectives + enough +to V

- Attributive and predicative adjectives.

* VOCABULARY

- Verbs: to annoy
to rise
to seem
- Adjectives

blond slim

curly sociable

fair straight

generous volunteer
reserved

-Nouns:
character
joke

orphanage

*UNIT ALLOCATION:

- Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen & read
- Lesson

<i>Prepare: 15/8/2010</i>
<i>Teach: 8A-17/8B-19</i>

PERiod 2: Unit 1: My friends

lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and read
I / Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Hoa LAN _ Nine
<i>and read the dialogue for details and review simple present and simple past tenses .</i>
II / Language content

-New words

-Grammar: Simple present tense.
-Structure: (not) Adj + enough +to V

III / Teaching aids : Text books , cards , cassette , chalk ...
IV / Procedure :

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

meet come live think send thought
receive met lived received came sent
- Remark and lead in new lesson .

2 / Presentation :
a. Pre- reading

*) Pre- teach vocabulary : Introduce the aims and
some new words

- to seem ( translation )

- a next door neighbor : a person who lives next to

your house

- to look like ( translation )

* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember
*) Pre- questions

- Give Ss some questions and ask them to work in
pairs to answer them

1. Is Nien Lan ‘s friend or Hoa,_{s friend ?}
2. How old is Nien ?

3. Where does Nien live ?
4. Is she a beautiful girl ?
b. While –<i> reading</i> :

- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to read
the dialogue between Hoa , Lan and Nien . Then
check if their answers are correct or not

Answers :

1. She is Hoa,_{s friend .}
2. She is 12 years old .
3. She lives in Hue .
4. Yes , she is .
3/ Practice

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and answer the

questions in exercise 2 / page 11

- Have them work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of
class and correct their mistakes or pronunciation .
- Correct and give feedback :

a) She lives in Hue
b) No , she does not .

c) The sentence is “ She was not old enough to be
in my class. “

d) At Christmas

- Ask them to work in open pairs to practice
asking and answering the questions and the
dialogue .

* Gap filling

- Ask Ss to use the present simple and simple past
tense to complete the paragraph , using some
verbs : live – send – be – come

Hoa ... in Hue last year , but now she ....in Ha
<i>Noi . Yesterday , Hoa ,_{s friend Nien ... Hoa a}</i>
<i>letter . Nien ... Hoa,_{neighbor when Hoa lived in}</i>
<i>Hue . She ... younger than Hoa . She ... to Ha </i>
<i>Noi in December . </i>

- Get Ss to work individually and then compare
their answers with their partners .

- Give feedback

lived – lives – sent – was – is - comes

Work in groups

Listen and write down .

Listen and repeat in chorus and
individually

Guess its meanings
Copy down

Play game in whole class.
Work in pairs

Listen carefully

Repeat all the correct answers
and copy down

Work in pairs

Demonstrate in front of class.

Practice asking and answering
the questions and the dialogue .

Complete the paragraph
individually .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

- Call on some Ss to read the completed paragraph
in front of class .

4/ Consolidation

- Ask Ss to write a paragraph about Hoa and Lan .
- Give Ss some cues and ask them to use the
simple present or past tense to write individually .
* Cues :

<i>a. Lan / Hoa,_{s best friend}</i>

<i>b. They / same class / Quang Trung School .</i>
<i>c. Last year / Hoa / to school first time .</i>
<i>d. Lan / show / round / introduce / to new </i>

<i>friends .</i>

- Let Ss discuss with their partners .

- Choose some answers and correct them in front
of the class .

5 / Home work :

1. Rewrite all the answers and complete
paragraph on their notebooks .

2. Do Exercise 1,2...in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Write a paragraph about Hoa ,
Lan

Demonstrate in front of class .
Listen and copy

<i>Prepare: 18/8/2010 Period 3</i>
Teach :8A- /8B-19 Unit 1 My friends

Lesson 2 : Speak +LISTEN

I / Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to describe someone .

<i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to complete the dialogue by listening </i>
II/ Language content

-New words

-Using: to be/ to have

III / Teaching aids :

<i>Textbooks , pictures , chalks ...</i>
IV/ METHOD : Communitive approach

V / Procedure : 8A-

/8B-I / Warm up : Brainstorming

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

body build and hair .

thin

long
* Possible answers :

- fat - straight
- slim - long
- tall

- short - Color : black / dark
- overweight blond / fair
- slender brown
grey
II / Speak :

1/Pre-speaking.

Show Ss a picture of Mary and ask them to
describe her hair , her body build .

Ex : She has long blond hair
She is short and thin

Form S + have / has + adjective + hair
S + be + adjectives

*Practice :
Word cue drill

- Prepare 6 cards so that students can drill easily .
a. He / tall / thin

b. She / short / slim
c. He / short / fat
d. Long / black
e. Curly / blond
f. Straight / brown

- Ask Ss to read their complete sentences aloud
- Correct and give feedback

a. He is tall and thin .
b. She is short and slim .
c. He is short and fat .
d. She has long black hair .
e. She has curly blond hair .
f. She has straight brown hair .

2. While-speaking

- Ask Ss to look at six people in their books .
- Call on a student to describe one person , the
others have to guess who he / she is

* Example :

S1 : This person is short and thin . She has long
blond hair .

S2 : Is this Mary ?
 Yes

- Go on until six people on the poster are described
3 . Post speaking : Writing

- Ask Ss to write all the sentences they have
described above .

.

Work in group

Read all the adjectives
aloud .

Look at the picture and
read the example aloud
Copy and give some

examples .

Work individually

Read the sentences
aloud .

Practice speaking in
front of class.

Write their sentences
alone

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

III/Listen

1 / Pre- listening:

- Ask Ss to look at the expressions in the box and
make sure they know their meanings .

How do you do ?
Nice to meet you

It is a pleasure to meet you .
I would like you to meet
Come and meet

- Get Ss to guess and to complete four dialogues ,

using the given expressions .

- Have Ss read their predictions and write them on
the board

2 / While - Listening :

- Let Ss listen to the tape twice .

- Get Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogues
and compare with their predictions .

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues
in front of class .

1. I would like you to meet ....
2. Nice to meet you ,

3. I would like you to meet ...
4. It,_{s a pleasure to meet you ,}
5. Come and meet

6. How do you do ?

- Ask Ss to practice speaking the dialogues .
3/ Post - Listening :

- Call on some Ss to play roles of Nam – Hoa –
Thu / Khai – Mrs Lien – Mrs Vi / Ba – Bao –
Grandmother / Mr Lam – Mrs Linh – Mr Thanh

and practice the dialogues .

- Let Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogues .
IV/ Homework :

. Copy all the right sentences above .
. Do the exercises in workbook .
. Prepare the next lesson

. Copy the complete dialogues on their notebooks
. Do the exercises in their workbook .

Work in groups

Look at the expressions
in the box .

Read them aloud .
Copy down

Guess the complete
expressions in the
dialogues .

Read their predictions
Listen to the tape
carefully

Work in pairs and
compare with their

predictions

-Practice the complete
dialogues

-Play roles to practice
the dialogues .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

<i>Prepare: 30/8/2010 Period 4</i>
Teach :8A- 31/8B- Unit 1 My friends
Lesson 3 : Read

I / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about
<i>Ba,_{s friend}</i>

II/ Language content :
<i>* Grammar :</i>

<i>* Vocabulary : (adj)reserved , sociable</i>

(n) character, joke, orphanage, sence of humor
III/ Teaching aids

Textbooks , cassette , chalks , board…
V/ Procedure : 8A-

/8B-1 / Warm up : How are you today?
2/ Check up:

-Ask ss to describe a friend in the class/other guess
- Correct mistakes if any and lead in the new
lesson .

3 / Pre - reading : Introduce the aims and some
new words to students

a. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- a character ( translation )

- an orphanage : a place where children without
parents live

- reserved (adj)
- sociable (adj)

- to tell jokes = to tell a story which makes people
laugh

- sense of humor ( translation )

* Checking vocabulary : What and where
- Write the word on the board , put one word in
each circle

b. T/F statements predictions

- Stick the poster of T / F statements are about Ba
and his friends , read them and guess which
statements are true , which are false :

a. Ba only has three friends – Bao , Song , Khai .
b. Ba and his friends have the same characters .
c. Bao – Song – Khai are quite reserved in
public .

d. They all enjoy school and study hard .
- Get Ss to work in pairs

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and
write them on the board .

4 / While - reading

- Ask Ss to open their books and read the text
carefully and check their predictions :

- Give feedback a. F b. F c. F d. T
- Ask Ss to correct the false statements
* Correction:

Answer

Work in groups

Listen carefully
Listen and repeat

Guess its meanings and
copy

Play games

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

a. Ba has a lot of friends , but he spends most of
his time with Bao , Song . Khai .

b. They have different characters .

c. Only Song and Khai are quite reserved .
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud
1. Choose the best answer and write :
- Explain the meanings of the phrases :

+ does not affect his school work : không ảnh hởng
tới việc học

+ rather shy : hơi nhút nhát
+ get tired of : nhàm chán

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to choose the best
answers .

- Call on some pairs to report their answers
- Listen and correct . Then give feed back

a. A b. C c . B d. D
2. Now answer the questions :

- Let Ss read the text again and work in pairs .
- Call on some pairs of students to ask and answer
the questions

- Correct and give feedback

a. He feels lucky having a lot of friends .
b. Bao is the most sociable

c. Khai likes reading

d. His jokes sometimes annoy his friends .

e. Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at
local orphanage .

- Let Ss practice asking and answering the
questions in open pairs .

5 / Post - reading :

- Ask Ss to work in groups and talk to one another
about their friends , using the adjectives they have
just learnt to describe .(poor ss …simply)

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class.
5 / Homework :

. Write a paragraph about one close friend ( about
50 words )

. Do the exercises in workbook .
. Prepare the next lesson .

Read their predictions
Read the text and check
their predictions

Correct the false
statements and copy
Read the text aloud
( 3 Ss )
Listen and copy down

Work in pairs to do the
exercise

Read their answers
aloud

Copy down

Practice asking and
answering the questions
Copy the right answers
Work in groups to talk
about their friends

Demonstrate in front of
class.

Listen and copy

<i>Prepare: 2/9/2010 Period 5</i>
Teach :8A- 3/8B-6 Unit 1 My friends

Lesson 4 : writE

I / Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a paragraph about their close
<i>friends. </i>

II/ Language content
*Grammar

- S + to be + Adj + enough

- S + spend + time/ money + V_ing
* Vocabulary

sociable, kind, generous, hard-working,
reserved, sense of humor, to annoy
III / Teaching aids :

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

1 / Warm up Slap the board

<i>( Using the words they have learnt in the previous </i>
<i>lesson ) </i>

2 / Pre - writing :

- Ask Ss to read the information about Tam , then
answer some questions .

a. What is his name ?
b. How old is he ?

c. What does he look like ?
d. What is he like ?

e. Where does he live ?
f. Whom does he live with ?
g. Who is his friend ?

- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions above .

- Correct and give feedback
a. Le Van Tam

b. He is 14

c. he is tall and thin . He has short black hair .
d. He is sociable , humorous and helpful
e. He lives at 26 Tran Phu Street , Ha Noi .

f . He lives with his mother and an elder brother .
g . Ba and Bao

3 / While - writing :

- Let Ss write a paragraph about Tam , using the
information they have just got .

- Work individually . Then compare with the
paragraph in their books .

- Ask Ss to write some information about one of
their friends , then write a paragraph about her /
him .

- Get Ss to share with their partners and correct if
possible .

* Sample :

His / her name ... . He / she is ...
<i>years old . He / she ...lives at ... in ... </i>
<i>with ... He / she is ... . He / she </i>

<i>has ...hair . He / she is ...helpful .</i>
<i>He / she has ... friends , but his / her </i>
<i>close friends are ... and ... . </i>

- Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud .

4 / Post - writing :

- Ask Ss to write a similar paragraph about himself
/ her self

- Go around the class and help Ss , then ask some
Ss to speak in front of class a bout himself / herself
5 / Homework :

. Write a paragraph about one of their family
members . (hstb)/ one of their friends(70-80
words-hsk,g)

. Prepare the next lesson .

Play games

Read the information
about Tam .

Practice asking and
answering the questions

Write a paragraph about
Tam individually

Read their writings
aloud .

Write another paragraph

, using the sample .

Demonstrate in front of
class.

Write about himself /
herself .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

<i> </i>

<i> </i>

<i> </i>
<i>Prepare: 5/9/2010 Period 6</i>

Teach :8A-6/8B-9 Unit 1: My friends
<i> Lesson 5 : Language focus </i>

I / Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to review the simple present tense to talk
<i>about general truths and write some sentences , using the structure (not) + adjectives </i>“
<i>enough + to infinitive </i>

II/Language content:
<i>* Grammar : </i>

- Simple present tense

- Present simple to talk about general truths

-(not) + adj + enough + to inf

<i>* Vocab:planet (n), Mars, Mercury, silly</i>

III / Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , boards ...
V/ Procedure: 8A-

/8B-1 / Warm up : Kim,_{s game}

( Using language focus 3 )

- Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 17 quickly .
Then let them keep their books closed .

- Divide the class into four groups .

- Give Ss two questions , the group which answers
correctly the fastest wins the game .

a. How many people are there in the picture ?
( Four )

b. What is each person wearing ?

- The Woman is wearing a red shirt and a green skirt .
- The man who is standing beside the car is wearing
brown trousers and a yellow shirt .

- The man who is standing on the pavement is wearing
a pink shirt and blue trousers .

- The boy is wearing blue shorts and a white shirt .
2 / Revision

A. Grammar :
a. Present simple :

* Present simple to talk about general truths - It is used
to express an action which is always true .

b. Past simple :

c. (not) adjective + enough + to – infinitive
Example : She is old enough to see that film .

Play game

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

She is not clever enough to do this thing .
B. Exercise :

<i>Ex 1: Complete the paragraphs . Use the correct form </i>
of the verbs in brackets

- Ask Ss to work individually and then compare their
answers with their partners .

- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
- Correct and give feedback

a. 1- lives 2- sent 3- was 4- is

b. 1- are 2- came 3- showed 4- introduced
<i>Ex 2 : Complete the dialogue .</i>

- Explain some new words :

+ a planet : the sun , the moon , the earth ...
+ Mars / Mercury ( translation )

+ silly ( adj) ( translation )

- Ask them to read the words in the box .

- Let them complete the dialogue between Ba and Tuan
, his young cousin .

- Call on some pairs to practice the complete dialogue .
- Correct their pronunciation and give feedback

1- sets 2- goes 3- moves 4- is 5- is 6- is
<i>Ex 4 : Set the scene to introduce the aims of the </i>
exercise :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs

- Call on some pairs to read the complete dialogue
- Correct and give feedback

a. not big enough
b. not old enough
c. strong enough
d. good enough
3 / Further practice

- Ask students to do exercise
a) Read English books/  good.
Can you read English books?

Yes. My English is good enough to read English
books.

b) Drive a car/old
Can you drive a car?

No. I’m not old enough to drive a car
c) Carry this bag/ strong

Can you carry this bag?

Yes. I’m strong enough to carry this bag.
d) Solve this problem/ clever

Can you solve this proplem?

No. I’m not clever enough to solve this problem
4 / Homework :

1. Ask Ss to write five sentences about themselves ,

using the structure : (not) + adjective enough +
to – infinitive .( hsk,g)

(Hstb) redo all exercises
2. Prepare the next lesson

Read the example and
give some more .
Work individually

Read their answers aloud
.

Copy down
Listen and copy
Read the words in the
box and complete the
dialogue .

Practice the dialogue
Copy down

Listen carefully .
Work in pairs

Practice the dialogues

Listen and copy .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<i> WEEK 3 </i>
<i> UNIT 2</i>

Making arrangements
*Aims:

Helping students:

- to talk about intetions

- to use telephone to make and confirm arrangements
- to take a telephone massage

*LANGUAGE CONTENT

-“ Going to “ talks about intentions and adjectives in the future.
- Adverbs of place

* Vocabulary

Verbs: to agree
to arrange
to conduct
to demonstrate
to emigrate

to transmit
Adjectives: commmercial

countless
<i> mobile</i>

Nouns : assistant
<i>deaf-mute</i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

- Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen & read
- Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen

- Lesson 3 : Read
- Lesson 4 : Write

- Lesson 5 : Language Focus

<i> Preparing date: 02 / 9/ 2009</i>
Period 7 Unit 2

Making arrangements
<i> </i>

<i>P:6/9/10</i> <i>Period 7</i>

<i>T:8A-7/8B-10</i> <i>Unit 2: Making arrangemens</i>

lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and read
I/ Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the telephone to make and
<i>confirm arrangements .</i>

II/ Languege content

<i>* Vocabulary : answering machine, telephone directory, address book </i>
<i>* Grammar :Would you like...? /Let s.../ Can I speak to...? </i>’
III / Teaching aids : Textbooks, poster , pictures ..

IV / Procedure : 8A-

/8B-1 / Warm up : Matching ( Getting started )
- Ask Ss to match each object with its name
* Answers :

a. an answering machine
b. a mobile phone

c. a fax machine

d. a telephone directory
e. a public telephone
f. an address book

- Give the definitions of these objects on a poster and
ask Ss to match the object with its definition .

* Definition :
1. to send fax

2. to find someone ,_{s telephone number}
3. to write address and telephone numbers
4. to make a phone call in street telephone box .

Work in groups

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

5. to leave and take messages

6. to make phone call anywhere you like
* Answers : a-5 b-6 c-1 d-2 e- 4 f-3
2/ Presentation :

a. Open prediction :

- Set the scene “ Hoa and Nga are talking on the
phone . They are talking about going to see a movie “
- Ask Ss to guess :

a. Who made the call ?
b. Who introduced herself ?

c. Who invented the other to the movies ?
d. Who arranged a meeting place ?

e. Who arranged the time ?
f. Who agreed to the time ?

- Have them work in pairs to guess the answers .
- Call on some pairs to report the answers and write
them on the board .

3/ Practice :

- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to read the
conversation between Nga and Hoa , then give them
feedback .

* Answers :

a. Nga made the call
b. Nga introduced herself .

c. Nga invited Hoa to the movies .
d. Nga arranged a meeting place .
e. Hoa arranged the time .

f. Nga agreed the time .

- Get some Ss to read the conversation aloud . Correct
pronunciation if any

* Comprehension questions :

- Give Ss some questions and ask them to work in
pairs to answer them .

1. What is Hoa,_{s telephone number ?}

2. Which movie are they going to see ? Where ?
3. How is Hoa going to see the movies ?

4. Where are they going to meet ? What time ?

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class .
- Remark and give feedback .

1. Her telephone number is 3847329.

2. They are going to see the movie Dream City at Sao
Mai Movie Theater .

3. Hoa is going by bike .

4.They are going to meet outside the theater at6.30
- Get some pairs to practice asking and answering the
questions ( open pairs )

** Matching the phrases with their meanings .

A B

1. Hold on a.Nó đợc chiếu ở đâu

2. Is six thirty all right ? b. kh¸ xa ...

3. Where is it on ? c. Sáu giờ 30 đợc chứ
4. A bit far from .. d.( Cầm máy ) chờ nhé

Answers : 1- d 2- c 3- a 4- b
4/ Consolidation :

* Role play :

- Ask Ss to play the roles of two Ss who are talking
on the phone making arrangements .

Listen to the scene

Work in pairs

Read their predictions
Listen to the tape , read the
conversation to check their
predictions

Practice asking and
answering the questions
Read the conversations aloud
( in pairs )

Work in pairs

Demonstrate in front of class
.

Practice asking and
answering the questions

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

- Let Ss work in pairs and move around the class and

help Ss .

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class .
5/ Homework :

1. Ask Ss to make a similar dialogue on their
notebooks .

2. Do exercise in work,sbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Work in pairs

Play the roles of the dialogue

Listen and copy .
P:9/9/10

T:8A-10/8B-13 Period 8

Unit 2 : Making arrangements
Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen

I / Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk on the phone about intentions
<i>with be going to /complete a telephone message by listening .</i>“ “

II / Language content
leave a message
make an appointment
available

III / Teaching aids : Textbooks , cards , chalks , ....
IV / Procedure : 8A-

/8B-1. Warm up : Chatting

- Ask Ss about using telephone .
a. Do you have a telephone at home ?
b. How often do you make a phone call ?
c. What would you say when you pick up the
phone to answer it ?

d. What would you say if you are the caller ?
2. Speak

a. Pre- speaking

- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 in pairs to put the

sentences in the correct order to make a complete
conversation .

- Call on some pairs to read their answers and
write them on the board :

* Answers : 1-b 2-f 3-j 4-a 5-i 6-c
7- e 8- k 9-g 10- h 11- d

- Call on some pairs to practice the conversation
they have arranged .

-Ask Ss some questions to check Ss,_{understanding}
and focus on the structure GOING TO

a. Are they talking on the phone ?
b. What do they intend to do ?

c. What time are they meeting ? Where ?

d. What form of the verbs do you use to talk about
intentions ?

=> S + BE + GOING TO + INFINITIVE
=> Express an intention

b. While - speaking :

- Set the scene “ Ba and Bao are making
arrangements to play chess “

- Ask Ss to work with partners to complete the
dialogue .

- Call on some pairs to play the roles of Ba and
Bao to practice the dialogue .

- Listen and give feedback
Ba : Hello . 8257012

Bao : May I speak to Ba , please . This is Bao .

Work in whole class

Work in pairs

Report their answers

Practice the complete dialogue
- Work in pairs

+ Yes , they are

+ They intend to go to the pop
concert

+ They are meeting inside the
center at 7.15

+ be going to
Listen and copy

Listen to teacher carefully .
Work in pairs

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

Ba : Hello , Bao . How are you ?
Bao : I am fine . Thanks , and you ?
Ba : Great . Me too.

Bao : can you play chess tonight ?

Ba : I am sorry . I can not play chess tonight . I am
going to do my homework .

Bao : What about tomorrow afternoon ?
Ba : Tomorrow afternoon is fine .

Bao : I will meet you at the Center Chess Club .
Ba : At the Central Chess Club ? Ok . Let ,_{s meet at}
the front door .

Bao : Is 2,00 o,_{clock OK ?}

Ba : Great . See you tomorrow afternoon at 2.00
o,_{clock .}

- Ask Ss to make the similar arrangements and
practice talking with a partner .

c. Post – speaking :

- Ask Ss to make sentences with “ Going to +
Infinitive “

Model sentences :

Are you going to see a movie ?
Yes , I am / No , I am not .

a. see a movie ( Yes )
b. play / sports ( No )

c. meet your friends ( Yes)
d. help your mother ( Yes )
e. do your homework (No)
f. watch TV ( No )

- Model two cues , then ask Ss to repeat chorally
then individually .

- Ask some Ss to practice asking and answering in
pairs .

Make similar dialogue .

Practice asking and answering
Listen and copy .

3. Listen

a. Pre- listening :

- Ask Ss to look at the form of the telephone
message on page 21 and set the scene “ a woman
phoned the principal of Kingston junior high
school , but he was out .”

- Have Ss guess the message .
- Let Ss work in pairs

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and
write them on the board .

b. While - listening :

- Turn on the tape twice and ask Ss to fill in the
message , compare with their predictions .
- Call on some Ss to read their answers after
checking .

* Answers :

Kingston junior high school
Date : ...Time : ...
For : The principal

Message : Mrs Mary Nguyen wanted to see you at
<i>9 . 45 in the morning</i>

Telephone number : 6463720942
- Call on some Ss to read them aloud .

Listen

Look at the form of the
telephone message and listen
to the scene

Guess the message

Read their predictions
Listen to tape carefully ,
compare with their prediction
Read their answers

Work in pairs to make
dialogue .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

c. Post - listening :

- Ask Ss to make a dialogue about the information
they have heard

- Go around the class and help them .

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue they
have made .

4 / Homework :

Write five things that they intend to do next week .
Copy the dialogue above .

Do exercise ( 3,4.) in workbook .
Prepare the next lesson .

Listen and copy

P:12/9/10 Period 9
T:8A-13/8B-16 Unit 2 Making arrangements

Lesson 3 : Read

I. Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Alexander Graham
<i>Bell</i>

II. Language content

*Vocabulary : emigrate (v), transmit, conduct , demonstrate, device, a deaf - mute
* Grammar : Simple past tense

III. Teaching aids :Textbook, posters, pictures of Bell
IV. Procedure :8A-

/8B-1. Warm up : Brainstorming

- Let Ss answer the questions by coming to the board
and write :

To chat with friend: What is the telephone use for?
Possible answers :

- to have a message
- to call someone
- to make arrangements

- to talk to a person who lives far from

- to get information at the airport or railway station
quickly

2. Pre - reading : Introduce the aims and some new
words to Ss .

a.Pre teach vocabulary :

- to emigrate = to go another country to live
- to transmit ( translation )

Play games

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

- to conduct = to carry out
- to demonstrate ( translation )
- a device ( translation )

- a deaf – mute = a person who is unable to hear and
speak .

* Checking vocabulary : What and where
b. T / F statements prediction :

- Hang the poster of T / F statements on the board and
ask Ss to work in pairs and guess which statements are
true or false .

a. Alexander G. Bell was born in the USA

b. He worked with deaf – mute patients in a hospital in
Boston .

c. Thomas Watson was Bell,_{s assistant.}

d. Bell and Watson introduced the telephone in 1877 .
e. Bell experimented his invention at a lot of exhibitions
- Call on some pairs to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

3. While - reading :
* True or false :

-Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look at their
books to read the text , then check their prediction

Guess Answer Correction

a F He was born in Edinburgh in

Scotland

b F He worked with deaf – mute

patients at Boston University

c T

d F He introduced telephone in 1876

e F He experimented with ways of

transmitting speech over a long
distance

f T

- Ask some Ss to read the correct answers aloud .
* Ordering :

- Ask Ss to look at the exercise and read the events of
Bell,_{s life , then put them in the correct order .}

- Have them compare with their partners
- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
- Correct and give feedback

= > Alexander Graham Bell
1. Was born in Scotland
2. went to live in Canada
3. went to live in the USA

4. worked with people who could neither speak nor
hear

5. worked with Thomas Watson

6. successfully demonstrate his invention
7. invented the telephone .

- Call on some Ss to read all the correct order sentences
aloud .

4. Post - reading : Writing it up

- Get Ss to write a paragraph about Bell,_{s life , using the}
information from the text .

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front
of class .

Listen carefully

Listen and repeat in chorus
, then individually .

Guess its meanings
Copy down

Play game

Look at the poster and
work in pairs to predict .

Read their predictions

Listen , read the text , then
check their predictions .

- Correct the false ones

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

- Correct mistakes if any and give suggestions :
5. Homework :

-Copy down their writings .
- Do the exercises in workbook .
- Prepare the next lesson .

Read their writings aloud .

Copy

P: 13/9/10

T: 8A-14/8B-16 Period 10
Unit 2: Making arrangements

<i> lesson 4 : write</i>

I. Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a telephone message
II. Language content

<i>Vocabulary : Customer, Delivery, stationery, pick up </i>
<i>Grammar </i>

III. Teaching aids : Textbook, posters...
IV. Procedure : 8A-

/8B-1. Warm up : Jumbled words
<i>1. mcuestor = customer </i>

<i>2.</i> ayddmi = midday
<i>3. essgmea = message </i>
<i>4. nifurretu = furniture </i>
<i>5. rvseice = service </i>
2. Pre - writing :

*Chatting :

– Ask Ss to take a telephone message
Have you ever taken a message ,

When you take a message , what should be
mentioned in the message ?

( Date , time who sent , to whom , content )
* Pre – teach vocabulary :

- a customer = a person who comes to buy
something at a shop .

- a delivery

- stationery ( papers ,pens , pencils , rulers .. )
- to pick someone up

* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember

3. While - writing :

* Reading and gap filling

- Ask Ss to read the message and fill in the gaps in
the message .

- Ask them to work in pairs

- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
Correct and give feed back

Answers :

<i> A customer phoned the Thang Loi Delivery </i>
<i>Service on May 12 just before midday . She </i>
<i>wanted to speak to Mr Ha but he was out . So Mr </i>
<i>Tam took a message for Mr Ha . The customer,_s</i>
<i>name was Mrs . Lien and she wanted to know </i>
<i>about her furniture delivery . She wanted Mr Ha </i>
<i>to call her . She said Mr Ha could reach her at </i>
<i>8645141 after lunch . </i>

- Ask Ss to read the passage 2 to get information
and write the message .

Play game

Practice asking and answering
the questions

Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .

Guess its meanings
Copy down

Play games

Read and do the exercise .

Read their answers aloud

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

- Let Ss write individually then share with a
partner .

- Call on some Ss to read their answers
- Correct and give feedback .

* Answers :

Thanh Cong Delivery Service
Date : June 16

Time : After midday
For : Mrs Van

Message : Mr Nam called about his stationery

order . He wanted you to call him at 8634082
Taken by : Mr Toan .

- Ask Ss to write another message , using the scene
“ Tom phoned Nancy , but she was out . Lisa ,
Nancy ,_{s sister took a message for Nancy . Help}
Lisa to write a message “

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Lisa and
Tom then , write the message .

- Let Ss work in pairs .
4. Post - writing :

- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud
- Correct and give feedback

* Answers :

Date : ( ...)
Time : ( ...)
For : Nancy

Message : Tom called about playing tennis this
afternoon. He will come over to pick you up at
1.30

Taken by : Lisa
5. Homework

Copy the message on their notebooks .
Do the exercises in workbook .

Prepare the lesson

write the message .
Read their answers

Copy down

Write a message , using the
information .

Read the dialogue .
Work in pairs

Read their answers .

Listen and copy

P:16/9/10 Period 11

T: 8A-17/8B-17 Unit 2: Making arrangements

Lesson 5: Language focus

I. Aims:By the end of the lesson, SS will be able to using all grammar and do exercise
eary.

II. Language contents:

- Structure: with be going to; adverbs of place

III. Teaching aids: Teacher’s book. Student book. Work book
IV. Procedure:8A-

/8B-Teacher's activities SS' activities

1. Warm – up :

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

information….
2.Review

Ask SS to look at the book and read

exercise 1 - Lool at

Ask SS question - Answer

- Which sentences are about intention? I’m going to see the movie Dream city
at 6.45. This evening. I’m using my…
Introduce structure.

“ be going to” chỉ dự định trong tơng

lai ( hành động) - Listen

3. Practice

Ask SS to read exercise carefully (a-e) - read
Ask SS to pratice with a partner - Practice

SS1: Nga has a movie ticket
SS2: She’s going to see a movie
Call some SS on the board practice.

Give right answer

a. They are going fishing - write

b. She is going to read the new novel
c. She’s going to do her homework
d. He’s going to watch anaction movie
on TV tonight.

e. She’s going to give him a birthday
presents.

* an action movie ( phim hành động) - Write
* To invite somebody to ( mời ai đó)

Ask SS to look at ex2

Ask SS to read exercise 2 then
complete the “ you” colum with checks
(v) and erosses

- listen
What are you going to do on the

weekend?

Are you going to.. You You partner
See a movie?

Play sports?
Meet your friend?
Help your parentes

Ask SS to work in pair - Work in pair

Call some SS on the board practice - Practice

What are you going to do on the
weekend?

Are you going to.. You You partner

See a movie? V X

Play sports? X V

Help your parents? v V
Ask SS to look at exercise 3

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

Then complete the speech bubbles. Use

each adverb in the box once. - listen
Ask SS to work in pair

Call some SS on the board practice - Practice.
Give right answer

a. upstairs
b. Here

c. downstairs Write

d. outside
e. there
f. inside
4. Remember

Repeat structure “ be going to”
5. Homework:

Learn and do exercise in the work
book.

UNIT 3 : AT HOME
*Aims:

Helping students:

- to describe places and situations.
- to ask for and give reasons

- to write a description of a room.
*Language content

- Reflexive pronouns

- Modals: Must, have to, ought to
- Why- Because

* Vocabulary
Verbs: to injure
to destroy

Nouns: bead rice cooker
<i> rug </i> chore
wardrobe cupboard

knife saucepan

mach scissors

<i> object </i> sink
<i> precaution</i> socket
safety steamer

*Unit allocation:

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen & read

Lesson 2 : Speak

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

Lesson 4 : Read
Lesson 5 : Write

Lesson 6 : Language Focus

<i> Preparing date: 07 / 9 / 2009</i>

P: 19/9/10 Period 12
T: 8A, B-20 Unit 3: At home

lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and read

I. Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and use
<i>modal verbs to talk about the housework .</i>

II.Language content
*Grammar

-Present simple tense,Future simple tense, modal verbs:have to,ought to
* Vocabulary

Grandma, cupboard, steamer, saucepan, frying pan, chore, yourself
III. Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , pictures ...

IV. Procedure :

1. Warm up : Getting started

- Show 6 pictures to Ss and ask them to look at
6 pictures quickly in 30 seconds and try to
remember the verbs in the pictures as many as
possible

- Which team remembering more verbs is the
winner.

Answer :

a. Wash dishes / do the washing up
b. Make the bed

c. Sweep the floor
d. Cook

e. Tidy up

f. Feed the chicken
2. Presentation :

Introduce the topic of the passage and some
new words

* Pre- teach Vocabulary :

- a steamer

Play game

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

- a cup board
- a sauce pan
- chore
- a sink

* Checking techniques : What and where
- Set the scene of the dialogue between Nam
and his mother , Mrs Vui .

- Ask Ss to complete the list of the things Nam
has to do .

- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their
books

and read their complete sentences :
<i> - cook dinner .</i>

<i> Nam has to - go to the market to buy fish </i>
<i>and vegetables.</i>

<i> - call his Aunt , Ms Chi and ask </i>
<i>her to meet his mother at grandma,_{s house}</i>
-> Form :

Has / Have to + Infinitive = Must + Infinitive
Model : What do you have to do ?

I must do the washing up .
-> Use the picture cues drill :

a. do the washing up
b. make the bed
c. sweep the floor
d. cook dinner
e. tidy my room
f. feed the chickens

- Call on some Ss to practice in front of class
* Have Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs .
3.Practice

-Give students 7

words:feed,empty,do,tidy,sweep,clean,dust.And
ask students to look at the pictures and

complete the dialogue between Nga and
Lan,using “must” or “have to”.

Nga: Can you come to the movie,Lan?
Nga: What do you have to do ?

Nga: That won’t take long. What’s else?

Nga:Ok.Let’s start. Then we can go out.
4. Consolidation :

- Ask Ss to write the lists of the things they
have to do on Sundays .

<i>Beginning with : On Sunday morning , I have to</i>
tidy my room ...

- Call on some Ss to read their writings in front
of class.

- Correct mistakes if any and ask them to copy .
5. Homework :

Learn by heart all new words they have
learnt .

Do their exercises in workbook .

Repeat in chorus and
individually

Guess its meanings and copy
Play game

Listen carefully

Listen to the tape while looking
at their books .

Read their sentences they have
completed

Copy and give examples

Practice in pairs

-Look at the pictures and

complete the dialogue between
Nga and Lan.

.

Lan: No. Ihave to do my chores.
Lan: I must tidy my bedroom.
Then I have to dust the living
room and I must sweep the
kitchen floor, too.

Lan: I have to clean the fish tank
and then I must empty the

garbage. Finally I must feed the
dog.

Demonstrate their writings

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

Prepare the next lesson .

P: 20/9/10 Period 13

T: 8A-21/8B-23 Unit 3: At home
Lesson 2: Speak

I. Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the prepositions of places to talk
<i>about the positions in the house .</i>

<i>II.Language content </i>

<i>* Grammar: to be, there is/ there are</i>
<i>* Vocabulary: rug, armchair, coffe table...</i>
III. Teaching aids : Pictures , chalks , ....
IV. Procedure : 8A-

/8B-1. Warm up : Kim,_sgame
- Devide the class into 2 teams

- Show the picture of a chicken to Ss .

- Ask them to study the things in the picture
- Take away the picture and ask Ss to write down
as many things as they can remember .

- Which team having more things win games .
2. Pre - Speaking :

- Ask Ss the positions of the items in the pictures .
Where is the clock ? It is above the fridge .
Where is the fruit ? It is in the bowl .
Where is the flowers ? They are on the table .
Where is the rice cooker ? It is next to the bwl of
fruit .

Where is the cupboard ? It is on the wall , above
the counter .

Where are the knives ? They are on the wall ,
under the cupboard .

Where is the dish rack ? It is on the counter ,
next to the bowl of fruit .

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions .

3. While - speaking :

- Get Ss to work in pairs , talking about the
position of each item

Ex : The calendar is on the wall , above the stove .
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of
class.

- Give feedback :

+ The sink is next to the stove .

+ The cupboard is on the wall , above the counter .
+ The knives are on the wall , under the cupboard .
+ The bowl of fruit is between the rice cooker and
the dish rack .

+ The clock is on the wall , above the fridge .
+ The flowers are on the table .

- Ask them to read all the suggested sentences
aloud .

4. Post - speaking :

- Set the scene : Mrs Vui bought new
furniture for her living room , but she can
not decide where to put it . You should help
her to arrange the furniture”

Play game

Practice asking and
answering about the
positions of each item .

Work in pairs

Read all the sentences
aloud .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

- Ask Ss to look at the picture and talk about
their ideas .

Ask Ss to practice speaking :
- If they agree , they may use :

Ok

You are right

- If they disagree , they may use :

No , I think we ,_{d better / ought to put ...}
I think it should be ...

Example :

- Let us put the clock on the wall , between the
shelf and the picture .

- OK . I think we ought to put the TV and the
stereo on the shelf …..

- Call on some pairs to practice speaking .
5. Homework :

Describe their living room or bedroom .

Do exercise 3,4 in workbook .
Prepare the next lesson .

Copy down

Read the examples

Practice speaking .
Listen and copy .

P: 23/9/10

T: 8A,B-24 Period 14

Unit 3: At home
<i> lesson 3 : Listen </i>

I.Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to identify the right item by listening .
II.Language content

*Grammar

It smells delicious
modal verbs

*Vocabulary: fry, put, cut, fried rice, pan, garlic, green pepper
III. Teaching aids : Cassette , textbooks , chalks , ....

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

1.Warm up : Bingo

- Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks 5
things you can eat .

- Prepare a list of food . Then call out each
word in a loud voice .

- Ss listen to the teacher carefully . If anyone
has the same things , they cross them out .
The first person crossing out all 5 things
shouts “ Bingo “ and wins the game .

Suggested list of food : Chickens , beef , cake ,
candy , garlic , noodles , bread , rice , ham ,
peas ...

2. Pre - listening :
* Predictions :

- Get Ss to look at page 30 and guess 4 things they
use to cook the Special Chinese Fried Rice “
- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

3. While - listening :

- Turn on the tape 3 times and ask them to check

their predictions .

- Give feedback
a. Fired Rice
b. Pan

c. Garlic and green peppers
d. Ham and peas .

- Turn on the tape once more to check the answers
again .

4. Post - listening : Mapped dialogue

- Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and Mrs Tu to
make a dialogue by listening the tape again .
<i>Lan : Can I help ..., Mom ? </i>

<i>Mrs Tu : Sure you can cook ...</i>
<i> Use the big pan please .</i>

<i>Lan : ...?</i>

<i>Mrs Tu : Just a little . Wait until it is hot and then </i>
<i>fry the garlic and the green peppers . </i>

<i>Lan : ...? </i>

<i>Mrs Tu : Yes . And you can put the rice and s </i>
<i>teaspoon of salt in . </i>

<i>Lan : YUmmy ! It smells ... . </i>

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in
front of class .

- Correct pronunciations if any .
5. Homework :

Copy down the dialogue in their notebooks .
Do exercise ... in workbook .

Prepare the next lesson .

Play game

Look at their books and
guess 4 things , they use
to cook the “ Special
Chinese Fried Rice “
- Read their predictions
Listen to the tape

carefully to check their
predictions .

Copy the answers .
Listen and check once
more .

Practice in pairs to make
a dialogue .

Practice in front of class

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

<i> </i>

<i>P:26/9/10</i> <i> Period 15</i>
<i> T: 8A,B-27</i>

Unit 3: At home
<i> Lesson 4 : Read </i>

I. Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the safety precautions in
<i>the house and use Why- because </i>

II.Language content

* Grammar :Modal verbs: must, must not, have to.

*Vocabulary:safety, precautions,matches,cause, fires,cissors,beadsocket,chemical,to
injure

III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , pictures , realias ...
IV. Procedure :8A-

/8B-1. Warm up :
Brainstorming

Possible answers :
- dug

- electricity
- boiling water
- fire

- gas
- knife

- Ask them to copy down .

2. Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to Ss

Play game

<b>Danger in the </b>
<b>home for </b>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

a. Pre – teach vocabulary :

- a precaution = sự phòng ngừa , sự đè phòng
- a socket ( realia )

- a match ( realia )
- an object = vật , đồ vật

- safety (n ) = sự an toàn
- to destroy = phá huỷ
- to injure ( situation )
* Checking : Slap the board

b. True / false statements predictions

- Ask Ss to read the statements and guess which is
true , which is false .

Statements Guess Key

1. It is safe to leave medicine around
the house .

2. Drugs can look like candy .
3. A kitchen is a suitable place to
play .

4. Playing with one match can not
start a fife .

5. Putting a knife into an electrical
socket is dangerous .

6. Young children do not understand
that many house hold objects are
dangerous .

F

T
F
F
T
T
- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them
on the board .

3. While - reading :
a. Reading the text :

- Turn on the tape , Ss look at poster to check their
prediction.

- Have them correct the statements which are false
1. It is safe to keep medicine in locked cupboards .
3. A kitchen is dangerous place to play .

4. Playing with one match can cause fire.
- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud ( 2 Ss )
b. Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to find out the answers of
these questions .

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions .

- Give feedback

a. Because children often try to eat and drink them
b Because the kitchen is a dangerous place to place
c. Because playing with one match can cause fire .
d. Because children often try to put something into
electrical sockets and electricity can kill .

e. Because the dangerous objects can injure or kill
children .

4. Post - Reading : Discussion

- Ask Ss to work in groups , discussing about the topic
* Safety precautions in the street .

* Safety precautions at school .
5. Homework :

-Copy down the answers above .
-Do the exercises in workbook .

Write down

Listen to the topic .

Listen and repeat in chorus
and individually

Guess its meaning s and copy
Play game in 2 teams

Read and predict

Read their predictions aloud .

Listen to the tape . look at the
poster to check their

predictions .

- Correct the false ones .
- Read the the text aloud

Practice asking and answering
the questions

Work in groups to discuss
about the topic .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

-Prepare the next lesson .

P:29/9/10 Period 16

T:8A,B-30Unit 3: At home

<i> lesson 5 : write </i>

I. Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a description of a room in their
<i>house . </i>

II.Language content
*Grammar

S+ to be / There is/are... ,Prepositions of places
*Vocabulary

bookshelf ,wardrobe ,oven ,refrigerator, towel rack

on the right, in the middle, beneath, on the right side of...
III. Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , board ...

IV. Procedure : 8A-
/8B-1. Warm up : Chatting

<i>( Asking something about the room on page 32 )</i>
a. Which room is this ?

b. What is this ? / Where is it ?

2. Pre - writing : Introduce the aims and some new
words to Ss :

* Pre- teach vocabulary :
- folder

- beneath
- dish rack
- lighting fixture

* Checking : Rub out and remember
* Reading

- Ask Ss to read the description of Hoa,_{sroom ,}
then ask some comprehension questions

a. What is there on the left of the room ?
b. Where is the bookshelf ?

c. What is there on the right side of the room ?
d. Where is the wardrobe ?

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Correct and give feedback :

a. There is a desk on the left of the room .
b. The bookshelf is above the desk .

c. There is a window on the right side of the room .
d. The wardrobe is beside the window and opposite
the desk .

- Call on some Ss to read the descriptions of Hoa,_s
room aloud .

3. While - writing :

- Ask Ss to describe Hoa,_{s kitchen , using the given}
cues .

- Ask Ss to share with their partners .

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in
front of class .

- Correct the mistakes from some descriptions if
any .

- Give feedback

<i>This is Hoa,_{s kitchen .}</i>

<i>There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the </i>
<i>room . </i>

<i>Next to the refrigerator are the stove and the oven</i>
<i>On the other side of the oven , there is a sink and </i>

Play game

Listen and copy the title of the
lesson .

Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .

Guess its meanings and copy .
Play game

Read the description and

practice asking and answering
the questions

Read the description aloud .
Work individually

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

<i>next to the sink is a towel rack . </i>

<i>The disk rack stands on the counter , on the right </i>
<i>of the window and beneath the selves . </i>

<i>On the selves and on the counter beneath the </i>
<i>window, there are jars of sugar , flour and tea . </i>
<i>In the middle of the kitchen , there are a table and </i>
<i>four chairs . </i>

<i>The lighting fixture is above the table , and </i>

<i>directly beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with </i>
<i>flowers . </i>

- Call on some Ss to read the completed
descriptions aloud .

4. Post- writing : Speaking

- Ask Ss to talk to their partners about their room /
living room / kitchen .

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their speeches in
front of class .

5. Homework :

Write a description of their living room .
Do exercises( ...)in workbook .

Prepare the next lesson .

Read the completed writing
aloud .

Practice speaking .

Demonstrate in front of class .
Listen and copy

P:30/9/10 Period 17

T: 8A,B-1/10 Unit 3: At home

lesson 6 : Language focus

I. Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the Reflexive Pronouns , modal
<i>verbs to talk about the house work and know how to use Why - Because . </i>

II. Language content

-Modal verbs:must, have to, ought to.
-Reflexive pronouns

-Question “Why”-Because

III. Teaching aids : Textbook , boards , chalks ...
IV. Procedure : 8A-

/8B-1. Warm up : Brainstorming
- tidy up

- do our homework
Things you - cook

can do - water flower
- clean the floor
- repair the machine
- fix the TV set
Things you - paint the house

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

can not do -
-

- Call on some Ss to talk with “ Can “
- Listen and correct mistakes if any

2. Revision and Practice

1. Reflexive pronouns

- Set the scene “ You do your homework and no one
helps you . What do you say ? “

I do my homework myself .
-> Explain the reflexive Pronouns
- > Form : We use I with myself

You ... yourself / yourselves
He ...himself

She ...herself
We ...ourselves
They ... themselves
It ... itself

- Emphasis pronouns : Used to emphasize a person or a
thing .

Eg : She cut herself .

John saw himself in the mirror .
Complete the dialogue :

- Ask Ss to fill in the blanks with suitable reflexive
pronouns or emphasis pronouns .

- Call on some pairs to practice speaking .
- Give feedback :

a. himself b. ourselves c. myself / yourself
d. himself / herself / themselves e. yourself .
- Ask them to practice the complete dialogue .
2. Modal verbs

- Set the scene : “ Hoa is very sad because she failed her
English test . What do you say to advise her ? “

“ You should study harder “

->Another word for “ should “ : Ought to
Ought to + Infinitive

- Ex 2 : Ask Ss to give advice to people in the pictures
( Language focus 2 )

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback :

a. I failed my English test .
You ought to study harder
b. You ought to get up earlier .

c. You ought to eat more fruit and vegetables .
d. You ought to see a dentist .

* Checking : Noughts and crosses :

His tooth /

ache Hoa / late My room / untidy
The floor /

dirty Bao / overweight She / thin
My English /

bad Hergrades / bad The washing machine / not
work

->Using “ Should “ to play game .

Ex 1 : Look at the pictures . Complete the dialogue , Use
Must or Have to and the verbs in the box :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue :
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class.

Talk the things you can do /
can not do

Listen to the scene and
answer the questions .

Write down and give
examples

- Work in pairs to complete
the dialogue

- Practice speaking

Listen and copy

- Practice in front of class.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

- Give feedback

1. must / have to tidy
2. have to / must dust
3. must / have to sweep
4. must / have to clean
5. have to / must empty
6. must / have to feed

4. Consolidation

Remind the use of modal verbs:must ,have to, ought
to, should and reflexive pronouns

5. Homework :

Do exercise 4 ( language focus 4 )
Copy all the exercises above .
Prepare the test .

Work in pairs

-> Demonstrate in front of
class .

Listen and copy .
-Listen and remember

<i> </i>
<i> </i>

3. Further Practice

-Have students do exercise :Fill in the blank with suitable pronouns
1.He was surprised when he look at

in the mirror.

1. I don’t like going to the cinema with other people.I prefer going by
3.The hild had no brothers or sisters, so she often had to play by

4.Don’t worry about Linh and me.We can look after
5.She made this cake

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

P: 1/10/10 Period 18
T: 8A,B-2 Revision

I.Aims:

By the end of the lesson. SS will be able to using all grammar and do exercise eary.
II. Language content:

*Vocabulary : in the Unit 1- unit 3
<i> *Grammar : </i>

+ Present simple + Reflexive pronouns

+ Not + (adj) + enough + To Inf + Modal verds

+ Be going to + Why – because

+ Adv of place

III. Teaching aids:Teacher’s book.Student book.
IV. Procudures: 8A-

/8B-Teacher's activities Students' activities

1. Warm up

-Ask students to write the structures " enough",
reflexive pronouns.

2. Consolidation

- review the structures they have learnt
a) The simple present tense

+ Form: S + V(s/es) + 0.

b) ( Not) + adjective + enough + to-infinitive.
c) be going to

+ Form: S + be going to + V-infinitive
d) Why- because

e) adverbs of place

Some adverbs of place: about, across, along,
abroad, around, away,anywhere, back, behind,
by, down,…

Inside # outside

Up stairs # downstairs
Here # there

f) Modal verbs:

Must + V, have to/ has to+ V: to show
obligation or necessity to do something.
Should + V, ought to +V :is used to give the
advice.

3. Practice

-Ask students to exercises

Exercise1: supply the correct form of the verbs
a. The sun ( rise) in the East

b. Bees ( make) honey.

c. The Earth ( move) around the sun.
d. The moon ( go) around the earth.

e. In my country , it ( not rain) much in winter.
Exercise 2: Combine the sentences ,using"Adj +
enough + to inf"

- Ask ss to combine the sentences
a. He is tall. He can play the volleyall.
b. My sister is very old. She can drive a car
c. The worker is very clever. He can make fine
things from wood.

-Write down

- Listen to the teacher and write down

- Students do chorally and individually
Answer:

a. rises
b. make
c. moves
d. goes

e. doesn't rain
- Students combine

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

<i>4. Test:15 minutes. Multiple choices:</i>

1. They put the __________ on the floor
(picture / cushion / rug / shelf)

2. On the right __________ of the room,
there is a window (side / vase / opposite /
corner)

3. Children don't understand many

_________ objects are dangerous (house /
household / home / work)

4. The woman washed dishes by

__________ (her / hers / she / herself)
5. You __________ to study harder next year

(must / should / can / ought)

6. Don't let your child __________ with
matches (play / playing / to play / played)
7. Tomorrow, we __________ a math test

(has / have / are having / are going to
have)

8. My Mom __________ the floors in the
morning. (sweeps / feeds / destroys /
injures)

9. The table is __________ the chair and
shelf (on / beside / next / between)

10.We shouldn't put something into _________
sockets. (electricity / electronics / electrical /
electrician

5. Remember

Remind all the structures
-Present simple tense

- (not ) adj + enough + to-infinitive
- adverbs of place

- reflexive pronouns
- Why- because
6. Homework

-Learn by heart the words in Unit 1- Unit 3
- Learn by heart the structures

- Prepare the Test.

- Write down and do it on papers
Key:1.rug

2.side

3.household
4. herself
5.must

6.play

7.are going to have
8.sweeps

9.between
10.electrical

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

Name:……… Test: 15minutes

Class:

1.They put the __________ on the floor (picture / cushion / rug / shelf)

2.On the right __________ of the room, there is a window (side / vase / opposite /
corner)

3.Children don't understand many _________ objects are dangerous (house / household
/ home / work)

4.The woman washed dishes by __________ (her / hers / she / herself)
5.You __________ to study harder next year (must / should / can / ought)

6.Don't let your child __________ with matches (play / playing / to play / played)
7.Tomorrow, we __________ a math test (has / have / are having / are going to have)
8.My Mom __________ the floors in the morning. (sweeps / feeds / destroys / injures)
9.The table is __________ the chair and shelf (on / beside / next / between)

10.We shouldn't put something into _________ sockets. (electricity / electronics /
electrical / electrician

P: 1/10/10

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

I / Objectives : Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt to do the test
<i>well . </i>

II / Content: Exercises that contains the knowledge from U 1 to U3.
III/ Teaching aids : Papers , chalks and boards .

IV / Time : 45 minuites.
V- Ma trận đề kiểm tra

Content NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiĨu VËn dơng Tỉng

TN TL TN TL TN TL

Listening

5
2,5

5

2,5
Language

focus

10

2,5

10

2,5
Reading 6₃ 6₃

Writing

4

2

4

2
Total

5

2,5

1 6

5,5

4

2
25

10
VI: Content

Q1. Listen and complete the telephone message : ( 2,5 ps )
Thanh Cong delivery service

Date :
Time :
For :

Message : ...
...
Taken by :

Q2. Choose the best answer A or B,C,D to complete the sentences

(Chọn đáp án A hoặc B, C, D hoàn thành các câu sau )2,5ps
1. Jack can’t reach the top shelf. He isn’t ... to reach it.

A. tall B. tall enough C. enough tall D. too tall
2. She arrived ... two o’clock ... the morning.

A. at/ in B. in/ at C. at / on D. at / of

3. Bao is the most ... He is also extremely kind and generous

A. mean B. hungry C. sociable D. hot

4. What does your father look ... ? – He is short and fat.

A. at B. in C. for D. like

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

A. rises/ sets B. sets/ rises C. rise/ set D. rises/ set
6. There will be a holiday ... Monday.

A. in B. at C. on D. of

7. What are you doing Mai ? - I am looking at ... in the mirror.

A. I B. myself C. my D. mine

8. You ... to go to school yourself.

A. must B. should C. ought D. has

9. Don't put the box there- put it ________

a.near b. here c.that d. nearby

10. Are you going to go to Hai Phong _________?

a.last night b. tommorow c.last month d. yesterday

Q3. Read the passage then check true (T) or false (F) sentence
( Đọc đoạn văn sau đó tích câu đúng (T) hoặc sai (F) )

This is Ba’s bedroom. There is a very beautiful picture on the wall. On the desk there are
some cartoons. There is a bookshelf opposite the picture. Ba’s bed is near the window.
From the window, you can see a lake. Near a lake, there is a tall building. Ba loves his
room a lot. He always keeps the bedroom clean and tidy.

(1) There is a window in Ba’s bedroom.
(2) Ba can see a park from his window.
(3) The room is always clean and tidy.
(4) There is a bookshelf in the room.

(5) There is a tall building opposite the lake.
6) There is a picture on the desk

Q4. Combine each of the following pairs of sentences into one sentence (using (not)
adjective + enough)

( Kết hp cac cp cõu sau thành một câu dung cấu trúc (not) adjective + enough)
1. He is strong. He can carry that suitcase.

...
2. The buffalo isn’t big. It can’t harm you.

...
3. You are not old. You can’t have a front-door key.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

4. He is not tall. He can’t be a good basketball player.

...

Question IV: Write two sentences about what you are you going to do on the weekend
(Viết hai câu về việc em dự định làm gì vào cuối tuần )

* Answer key:

Question I: 4 points (each sentence 0,5 points)
1. B 5. A

2. A 6. C
3. C 7. B
4. D 8. C

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

3. You are not old to have a front-door key.

4. He is not tall enough to be a good basketball player.
Question III: 3 points (each sentence 0,5 points)

(1) There is a window in Ba’s bedroom T
(2) Ba can see a park from his window. F
(3) The room is always clean and tidy. T
(4) There is a bookshelf in the room T
(5) There is a tall building opposite the lake.
(6) There is a picture on the desk

Question IV: 2 points (each sentence 1 point)
( Students answer themselves)

<i>P:3/10/10</i> <i> Period 20</i>

<i>T: 8A,B-4</i>

Correcting the test

I.Objectives: After the lesson, Ss know about the common mistakes and they know how
to learn progressively

II. Teaching aids:

Papers , chalks and boards
III. Procedure:

- Write all exercises on the extra board, and then ask Ss to do them again.

F

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

- Remark and correct the mistakes

Answer key:

Question I. Listen and complete the telephone message : ( 2,5 ps )
+ Tape script

A customer telephoned the Thanh Cong Delivery Service on October 2 at 8 o<i>,_{clock in}</i>
<i>the morning. The customer,_{s name was Mrs Hoa , and he wanted to speak to Mrs Lan .}</i>
<i>Mrs Lan was in a meeting and could not come to the phone . So Mr Hong took a </i>

<i>message . Mrs Hoa called about his stationery order . She said Mrs Lan could reach her </i>
<i>at 0985360931. </i>

Thanh cong delivery service
Date : October 2

Time : 8 a.m
For : Mrs Lan

Message : Mrs Hoa called about his stationery order. She wants you to call her
with his telephone number 0985360931

Taken by : Mr Hong.

Question II: Choose the best answer A or B,C,D to complete the sentences

2,5 points (each sentence 0,5 points)

1. B 5. A 9.B
2. A 6. C 10.B
3. C 7. B

4. D 8. C

Question III: Read the passage then check true (T) or false (F) sentence
3 points (each sentence 0,5 points)

(1) There is a window in Ba’s bedroom
(2) Ba can see a park from his window. F
(3) The room is always clean and tidy. T
(4) There is a bookshelf in the room T
(5) There is a tall building opposite the lake.
(6) There is a picture on the desk

Question IV: Combine each of the following pairs of sentences into one sentence (using
(not) adjective + enough)

2 points (each sentence 0,5 points)
1. He is strong enough to carry that suitcase.

2. The buffalo isn’t big enough to harm you.
3. You are not old to have a front-door key.

4. He is not tall enough to be a good basketball player

IV. Total mark

Ecellent 8A 8B

Good
Sastify
Poor

V.Homework
Redo theexer

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

Be ready for next

WEEK 7 Preparing date:25/ 9/ 2009
<i> </i>

Period 19
Test number 1

A / Aims and Objectives : Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt
<i>to do the test well . </i>

B / Teaching aids : Papers , chalks and boards .
C / Test :

I / Listening comprehension : Listen and complete the telephone message : ( 2,o ps )
thanh cong delivery service

Date :
Time :
For :

Message : ...
...
Taken by :

I I / Choose the word or phrase that best complete each unfinished sentence below(2,0ps)
1."Which girl is Mary?" She is one with________.

a.long curly black hair b. curly long black hair
c. long black curly hair d. curly long black hair
2. That boy seems _________.

a. happy b. happily c. happiness d. be happy
3. The sun ________ in the East.

a.rise b. rises c.rose d. rising

4. He _______ to do his homework.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

5. Don't put the box there- put it ________

a.near b. here c.that d. nearby

6. Are you going to go to Hai Phong _________?

a.last night b. tommorow c.last month d. yesterday
7. Let me carry my bag________

a. himself b.herself c.yourself d. myself

8. They were tired _________ they worked hard all day.

a. because b. so c.so that d.although

III / Read the passage,then use the words given to complete it. ( 2,0 Ps)
Dear Luis,

T am your new friend! My first name is Andy and my(1)_________is Wong. I am

fromCheadle, in the north of England, and I am sixteen (2)_________old. I'm fairly tall,
with(3)________.And I wear glasses.I enjoy(4)_________jokes and my friends

usuallyenjoy my sense of (5)________. The name of my school is Cheadle School, and I
am(6)_________ year 8. There (7) _________thirty students in my class. My favorite
subject is Maths and my(8)__________sport is tennis.

1, a.second name b. middle name c.family name d.nick name

2,a. year b.years c.0 d. a & b are correct

3, a.short curly blond hair b. blond short curly hair

c. short blond curly hair d. blond curly short hair

4, a.tell b.to tell c. telling d. to telling

5, a.humor b.humorous c.humorously d.humorousness

6, a. in b.on c. at d. of

7, a.is b.are c.has d.have

8, a.favorite b. good c.most d.lucky

VI/ Supply the correct form of the verbs (1,0p)
1, We(be) in Grade 8 this year

.

………

2, They ( see) movies at the cinema tonight.

.

………

3, The children should (go) to bed early.

..

………

4, The earth ( run) around the sun.

..

………

Preparing date25/9/2009
PERIOD 20

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get their mistakes which they made in their
writing test and they will remember the way that they can repair them.

B / Language content
*Vocabulary

* Grammar
C/ Teaching aid
- Chalk, blackboard
D / Procedure

/ Choose the word or phrase that best complete each unfinished sentence below(2,0ps)
1 ."Which girl is Mary?" She is one with long curly black hair

2. That boy seems happy .
3. The sun rises in the East.
4. He has to do his homework.

5. Don't put the box there- put it here

6. Are you going to go to Hai Phong tonight
7. Let me carry my bag myself

8. They were tired because they worked hard all day.
II / 2,0 points

Ss get 0,5 ps for each correct one

1. He is not tall enough to reach the shelf .

2. The book was interesting enough for me to read twice .
3. I will give you a ring tomorrow morning .

4. It is dangerous to put a knife into an electrical socket

III / Read the passage,then use the words given to complete it. ( 2,0 Ps)
Dear Luis,

T am your new friend! My first name is Andy and my(1) family name is Wong. I am
fromCheadle, in the north of England, and I am sixteen (2)___years__old. I'm fairly tall,
with(3) short curly blond hair.And I wear glasses.I enjoy(4) telling jokes and my friends
usually enjoy my sense of (5) humor . The name of my school is Cheadle School, and I
am(6) in___ year 8. There (7) are thirty students in my class. My favorite subject
is Maths and my(8)_favorite_sport is tennis.

IV / Listening comprehension : Listen and complete the telephone message : ( 2,o ps )
+ Tape script

A customer telephoned the Thanh Cong Delivery Service on may 11 just twelve
<i>o,_{clock . The customer},_{s name was Mr Nam , and he wanted to speak to Mrs Van . Mrs}</i>
<i>Van was in a meeting and could not come to the phone . So Ms Toan took a message . Mr </i>
<i>Nam called about his stationery order . He said Mrs Van could reach him at 884 . 846. </i>

thanh cong delivery service
Date : May 10

Time : 12 a.m
For : Mrs Van

Message : Mr Nam called about his stationery order. She wants you to call him
with his telephone number 884 846

Taken by : Mr Toan.

<i> V / Phonetic: Choose the word that has the underlined part pronouced differently from </i>
the other. (1,0p).

1, a.classmate b. character c. grade d. place

2, a. enough b. extremely c. generous d. planet

3, a.lucky b. volunteer c. sun d. public

4, a.reserved b.received c.booked d. enoyed

VI/ Supply the correct form of the verbs (1,0p)
1, We are in Grade 8 this year

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

4, The earth runs around the sun.

<i> </i> <i> </i>

<i> Preparing date: 25/9 /2009</i>

Period 21 Unit 4
Our past
lesson 1 : Getting started
Listen and read

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell the activities
<i>people used to do in the past .</i>

B/Language content
a)Gramamar

-used to +V_infinitive
-had to +V

-What... like ?
b)Vocabulary
equipment

folk tale =traditional story :truyen dan gian
to look after, to lit

gread grandma

C / Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , chalks ...
D / Teacning method

Complete the dialogue in pairs,answer the questions and discuss in groups
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Getting started

- Ask Ss to look at the picture and write the names of
the things that do not belong to the past .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

- The TV
- The radio
- The mobile
- The light fixture

- Modern clothing / school uniforms
II / Presentation: `

`Give some new words

- to look after = to take care of
- Equipment (n) - example

- a folk tale : Tam Cam is a folk tale
- Traditional ( adj )

- a great grandma (n)

* Checking : What and where
2. T / F statements prediction

- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict they are
true or false .

Statements Guess Key

1. Nga is used to live on farm
2. Nga ,_{s grandma did not go to}
school .

3. She has an easy and happy life
when she was young .

4. There was not any modern
equipment at her time .

5. “ The lost shoe “ is a short story

F
T
F
T

F
- Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them
on the board .

III /Practice

- Turn on the tape 2 times and look at their books to
read the dialogue between Nga and her Grandma to
check their predictions

- Ask them to correct the false statements .
1. Grandma used to love on farm

3. She had a hard life .
5. It is an old folk tale .
* Comprehension :

- Get Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering
questions

- Give feedback

a. She used to live on a farm .

b. Because she had to stay at home and help her
Mom to look after her younger brothers and sisters .
c. She used to cook the meals , clean the house and
wash the clothes .

d. Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and her

great father used to tell stories .

e. She asked her grandma to tell her the tale “ The
lost shoe “

- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions .

* Fact or opinion

- Have Ss read the statements part 3 and decide
which is a fact and which is a pinion .

Statements Fact Opinion

a. I used to live on a farm .
b. There was not any electricity .
c. Mom had to do everything

X
X
X

Play game

Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Guess its meanings
and copy down
Play game

Work in groups

- Read their
predictions

Listen to the tape and
look at their books to
check their predictions
- Correct the false ones

Practice asking and
answering the
questions .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

without the help of modern
equipment .

d. My father used to tell us stories
e. The best one was the lost shoe .
f. Traditional stories are great .

X

X
X
- Give feedback

IV / Consolidation Survey

Did you use to ...? Name
- Get up late .

- Ride bicycle too fast .
- Go to school .

- Eat too much candy .

- Forget to do your homework

- Give feedback by asking Ss some questions to
check “ Who used to get up late / ride bicycle too
fast ...? “

- Write it down .
V / Homework :

1. Write the result of their survey .
2. Learn by heart new words .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Practice in groups
Demonstrate in front
of class .

Listen and copy .

Ngµy 05 / 10 / 2009

<i> </i>

<i> WEEK 8 </i>
<i>Preparing date: 05/10/2009</i>

Period 22 Unit 4: our past

LESSON 2: speak and listen
A.THE AIMS

By the end of the lesson. SS will be able to speak talk about the way things used to
be and the way they are now.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

Past tense
Used to +V
b)Vocabulary

lay egg , in amazement ,foolish man ,greedy wife.
C. Teaching aids:

- Teacher book.
- Student’s book.
- Work book.
- Picture.
- Cassettes.
D/ TEACHING METHOD :
Communitive approach

E. Procedure:

Teacher's activities SS's activities

I / Warm up :

Brainstorming

- Ask Ss to write their ideas on the blackboard .
* Possible answers :

- Speak English to friends in class
- Watch English TV

- Do grammar exercises
- Read English stories

- Read English newspapers / magazines
- Listen to the English radio program

II/ Speak

1) Pre - speaking : Introduce the topic of the
speaking .

- Call on some Ss to read the possible answers
above and copy down .

- Have Ss read the questions and words in the
boxes.

2) While – speaking
* Model :

Lan said she did her homework after
<i>dinner</i>

<i> He / she said ………</i>

- Call on some pairs to read the model

Work in groups to play games .

Read all the ways of improving
English .

Copy in their notebooks .

Listen and read the model ,
then copy

Work in pairs

Practice in front of class.
Work individually .
Read their writings
<i><b>How to improve your </b></i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

- Ask Ss to work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
class.

- Correct mistakes if any .
3) Post - speaking :

- Ask Ss to write with information above .
Eg : Lan ,_{s elder brother helps him with his}
homework .

- Call on some Ss to read their writings .
III/ Listen

1) Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the
listening and some new words :

* Pre – teach vocabulary :
- behavior (n) = cach cu sw

- A participant (n) = nguoi tham gia

- Satisfactory >< unsatisfactory (a) = thao mai
- cooperation (n) = hop tac

- attendance (n) =

- to appreciate = danh gia cao
* Checking : What and where

* Prediction :

- Ask Ss to look at Nga,_{s report and predict the}
missing information and then compare with
their partners .

a. day present (1)
b. Day absent (2)

c. Behavior – participant (3)
d. Listening (4)

e. Speaking (5)
f. Reading (6)
g. Writing (7)

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and
write them on the board .

2) While - listening :
* Listen :

- Get Ss to listen to the tape and check their
prediction .

- Call on Ss to read their results and give
feedback .

1. 87 days present
2. 5 days absent

3. participation : Spanish pronunciation
4. Listening : Comprehension

5. Speaking : A

6 . Reading : A 7 . Writing : B
2. Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to answer some questions about Nga,_s
report card .

1. Who are Nga,_{s parents ?}

2. What is Nga,_{s teacher},_{s name ?}

3. What subject was reported ? For what term ?
4. What are the comments ?

5. What does S stand for ? What about F UA B
CD ?

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and work in
pairs to answer the questions .

Listen and copy .

Listen and repeat in chorus and
individually .

Copy down .
Play game

Predict and compare with their
partners .

Report their predictions .

Listen to the tape and check
their predictions

Read their results .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class
.

- Give feedback .

3) Post - listening : Survey

Questions You Your

partne
r
1. When do you do your

homework ?

2. Who helps you with your
homework ?

3. How much time do you spend
on Maths / English / History /
Literature ?

4. Which subject do you need to
improve ?

5. What do you do to improve
your English?

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking their partners
questions and taking notes of the answers .
- Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 0r 5 to report
what they have known about their partners,
study .

- Correct mistakes if any .
V / Homework :

1. Copy the effective ways of learning English
they have found out .

2. Do exercises in workbook .

3. Write something about your partners,_study
habits

Eg : Lan is my best friend . She works very
hard and always get good grades . she usually
does her homework after school

questions .

Practice asking and answering
the questions and report their
survey .

Listen and copy

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<i> Preparing date: 05/10/2008</i>
Period 23 Unit 4

Our past
Lesson 3 : Read

A/ Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand and
<i>retell the story - The lost shoe .</i>

B/ Language content
a)Grammar

Simple past tense
b)Vocabulary

Stout Nut, cruel ( adj) , upset, fairy , rag , fall in love with,

C / Teaching aids : Text book , word cards for drilling , cassette ...
D/ Teaching method :

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Brainstorming

Name some folks tales that you have read .
 Possible answers :

- Cây tre trăm đốt ( one hundred-section bamboo )
- Tấm cám

- Hoµng tử Cóc ( The frog Prince )
- Đôi hài 7 dặm ( Seven mile shoes )

- Bạch tuyết và bảy chú lùn ( Snow white and 7
dwarfs )

II / Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to Ss .

* Pre – teach vocabulary :
- cruel (a) = độc ác , ác nghiệt
- upset (a) = worried

- fairy (n) = truỵện cổ tích
- magical (a) -> magically (adv)
- rag (n) ( realia )

- to fall in love with = yªu

- immediately (adv ) = ngay lËp tøc
* Checking : ROR

* T / F statements predictions

- Ask Ss to work in groups to predict

Statements Guess Key

1. Little Pea,_{s father is poor}
farmer

2. Her father got married again
after his wife died .

T
T

Play games

Copy some names of the
stories in English .

Listen and copy

Listen and repeat in
chorus , individually .
Guess its meanings and
copy .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

3. Her new mother was beautiful
and nice to her .

4. She worked hard all day .

5. She did not have new clothes to
take part in the festival .

F
T
F
- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board

III / While - reading :

1. Checking the predictions :

- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to look at
their text books to check their predictions and
correct the false ones .

- Sentence 3 : Her new mother was cruel to her .
- Sentence 5 : A fairy gave her beautiful clothes.
- Call on 2 Ss to read the story – Correct mistakes
if any .

2. Comprehension questions

- Ask Ss to work in pairs answering the questions
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and

answering .

- Listen and give feedback

a. She was a poor farmer ,_{s daughter .}
b. She made her do the chores all day .

c. Before the festival started , a fairy appeared and
magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes .
d. He decided to marry Little Pea because the shoe
fitted her .

e. Ss answer themselves .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class.
3. Gap filling : Complete the sentences with words
from the story .

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , filling the blanks with
suitable words from the story .

- Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences
aloud .

- Give feedback
a. farmer b. died

c. used d. marry / choose
e. clothes f. lost

IV / Post - reading :
 Retell the story

- Have Ss work in pairs , telling the story again in
details ( They can look at the statements in the gap
filling exercise and add more )

- Call on some Ss to retell the story in front of class .
- Correct mistakes if any

V / Homework :
1. Rewrite the story .

2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Work in groups

Read their predictions

Listen and check their
predictions .

Read their results and
correct the false ones .

Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering the
questions

Work in pairs to

complete the sentences
Read their complete
sentences .

Listen and copy .

Work in pairs to retell the
story in details .

Demonstrate in front of
class .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

<i>Preparing date: 05/10/2009</i>

Period 24 <i> Unit 4</i>
Our past

lesson 4 : Write

I. Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Simple Past Tense to write a folk
<i>tale .</i>

II. Language content

<i>a) Vocabulary : wisdom, a stripe , straw , servant, escape, graze , buffalo </i>
<i>b) Grammar : simple past tense </i>

III. Teaching aids :<i>Text book , eleven cards , chalks , boards . </i>
IV. Teaching method : Communitive approach

V. Procedure : 8A-
/8B-T’s activities
1. Warm up : Chatting

- Ask Ss some questions about imaginary stories
a. Do you want to read imaginary stories ?
b. Name some of them

c. Which story do you like best ?

d. Have you ever read the story “ how the tigers got
his stripes “ ?

2. Pre - writing : Introduce the aims of the writing
and some new words .

a. Pre- teach vocabulary :

- wisdom ( n) : trÝ kh«n
- stripe (n) ( realia )
- straw ( n) ( realia )

- servant (n) : ngêi phục vụ , đầy tớ
- to graze ( picture )

- to escape : trèn tho¸t

- to light – lit – lighted ( mime )
* Checking : Matching

A B

1. wisdom a. trèn tho¸t

Ss’ activities
Play game

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

2. a stripe b. đờng sọc
3. a straw c. ăn cỏ , gặm cỏ
4. a servant d. trí khơn

5. graze e. rơm rạ

6. escape f . đầy tí

- Ask Ss to come to the board to match items on

the left with those on the right by drawing a line
connecting the story .

* Reading :

- Ask Ss to read and complete the story .

- Call on Ss to say the meanings of the verbs in the
box .

- Have them work in pairs , using suitable verbs to
fill in the blanks .

- Call on them to read their answers aloud .
- Give feedback

1. appear 2. as 3. said 4. left
5. went 6. lit 7. burned 8. escaped
+ Comprehension questions :

1. where was the man ?

2. What did the buffalo do when the tiger
appeared ?

3. What did the tiger want to know ?

4. What did he do before going home ? Why ?
5. What did he do when he returned ?

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions above .

III / While - writing :

- Get Ss to do exercise 2 . ( Ss have to imagine to
be a man in order to write the story )

+ Notice : Change

The man -> I / His -> My

- Ask Ss to work individually , then share with their
partners and correct mistakes .

- Take some writings to correct in front of the class.
- Give suggested answers :

IV / Post - writing : Telling the story

- Divide the class into 2 teams . Team A plays the
role of the tiger . Team B plays the role of the
buffalo

- Ask them to work in team , telling the story
Notice :

- Team tiger changes : a / the tiger -> I
- Team buffalo changes : a / the buffalo -I
V / Homework :

1. Write the story again , imagine you are :
* The tiger

* The buffalo

2. Prepare the next lesson .

Work individually .

Read the verbs in the box
and say the meanings of
them .

Read the complete story .

Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering the
questions .

Write the story
individually .

Demonstrate in front of
class.

Play the roles of tiger and
buffalo , telling the story .
Listen and copy .

<i> </i>
<i>Ngµy 12/ 10/ 2009</i>

<i> </i>

<i> </i>
<i> WEEK 9 </i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

Our past
Lesson 5 : language focus

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use prepositions of
<i>time and Used to ( to talk about the action which always happens in the past ) and </i>

<i>further practice in the Past Simple Tense .</i>
B/ Language content

* Vocabulary
* Grammar

Simple past tense
Used to

Prepositions of time

C / Teaching aids : Text books , boards , chalk …….
D / Teaching method

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up :

Matching

A B Key

1. In a. January 1.a / d

2. On b. 3 p m 2. c / e

3.At c. Wednesday 3. b / f

4. Between d. November 1997 4. f
5. After / Before e. July 2nd _{5. b}

f. 7 a m and 9 am
- Call on some Ss to read aloud each phrase .

- Explain the uses of some prepositions of time and
ask Ss to do Exercises

II / Consolidation and Practice
1) Consolidation

a) The simple past tense
+ Form

+ The use: express an action happened in the past
b) The simple past tense with "used to"

+ Form: S + used to + V- infinitive

Use: used to express a past habit, or an action
usually happened in the past

c) Prepositions of time: in ,on, at, between, after,
before.

2) Practice

*Exercise 1: Write the past simple form of each verb
- Explain the meaning of some each verbs to the
students.

- Have students do exercise
- Give the correct answer

a) ran e) had i) ate

b) flew f) did j) sat

c)took g) was/ were k) came

d) went h) rode

Exercise 2 : Complete the dialogue
- Have students in pairs

Exercise 3 / page 44

- Ask Ss to work individually , then compare with
their partners .

- Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences
aloud .

Play game

Read the correct phrases
aloud

- Listen and write down.

- Do exercise

- Work in pairs
Work individually
.Compare with their
partners .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

<i>a. on b. in c. between d. at / after e. before</i>
Exercise 4 : Complete the dialogue :

- Have Ss work in pairs , looking at 4 verbs , using
USED TO with the verbs “ Live – Stay – Have –

be “ to complete the dialogue between Nga and
Hoa .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback .

<i>0. used to stay 2. used to be </i>
<i> 1. used to have </i> <i>3. used to live</i>
III / Further practice :

Deliberate mistakes

- Read aloud some sentences and ask Ss to listen
carefully and try to find out the mistake . When they
hear a mistake , they stand up and say No then
correct it .

Eg : T : I usually stay at home in Sunday
Ss : No , on Sunday , not in Sunday .

a. My father used to play football when he has
spare time .

b. She used live in Ha noi .

c. My parents will arrive in 3 o,_{lock .}
d. He was born in June the third .
IV/ Consolidation

- Remind the simple past tense

simple past tense with "used to"
Prepositions of time

V/ Homework :

1. Do exercises (1,2) in textbook .
2. Do the exercises in workbook .

sentences aloud .
Copy down .
Work in pairs

Practice the dialogue .

Play game
( Whole class )

Listen and copy .
<i> </i>

<i> </i> <i>Preparing date: 10/ 10/ 2009</i>

Period 26 unit 5

Study habits
Lesson 1: Getting started
Listen and read

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the
<i>dialogue between Jim and his Mom about his study .</i>

B / Language content

<i>* Vocabulary : repost card , pronunciation, improve, be proud of, try one's best </i>
<i>* Grammar : Reported speech </i>

C/ Teaching aids :

Pictures in textbook and cassette player
D/ Teaching method:

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Net work

- Ask Ss to write as many subjects as they can on the

blackboard Work in groups to play

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

 Possible answers :

Chemistry / Physics / maths / geography / literature /
history .

- Lead in the new lesson by Chatting
II / Presentation :

- What subjects are you good at ? / bad at ?
- What subject do you like best ? / Why ?
- How often do you have maths ? / Literature..?
* Pre- teach vocabulary :

- a report card ( realia )
- pronunciation ( mime )
- to improve ( situation )
- to be proud of = tu hao

- to try one,_{s best = co gang het suc}

* Checking : Rub out and remember
**. T / F statements predictions

- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict they are
true or false .

Statements Guess Key

1. Tim was out when his mother

called him . F

2. Tim,_{s mother met his teacher at}

school . F

3. Tim,_{s report is poor .} _F

4. Tim needs to improve his

Spanish grammar T

5. Tim promised to try his best in

learning Spanish . T

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

III / Practice :

- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books ,
then read the dialogue to check their predictions .
- Call on some Ss to read their results .

- Give feedback :

- Ask Ss to correct false statements .
1. Tim was in the living room / at home
2. his report is excellent

3. He needs to improve his Spanish pronunciation .
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front
of class .

- Listen and correct their pronunciation if any .
* Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , answering the questions .

Read the answers aloud .
Chat the questions .

Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .

Copy down
Play game

Work individually

Read their predictions aloud .
Listen and read the dialogue
to check their predictions .
Correct false ones . Read
them aloud .

Practice the dialogue in pairs
.

Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering the
questions .

Open pairs
<b>Subjects at </b>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions .

- Give feedback .

a. She is Tim,_{s teacher .}

b. She gave Tim,_{s mother his report card .}
c. He worked really hard .

d. She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish
pronunciation .

e. She gave him a dictionary

- Ask them to practice in open pairs .
IV / Consolidation : Survey

- Ask Ss to work in groups by standing to ask each
other the question “ What subject do you need to
improve ? “ and they have to write the names and
the subjects that their friends answer :

Name What subject

Lan

…………. History ………..

- Ask Ss who need to improve the same subjects
work in group and discuss how to improve .
V / Homework :

1. Write the way how to improve the subject that
they are not good at .

2. Prepare the next lesson .

Work in groups

Listen and copy .

<i> </i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

Study habits
lesson 2 : Speak + LISTEN

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about their
<i>study habits . </i>

<i> By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listen for specific information to fill in a </i>
<i>report card . </i>

B/ Language content :

<i>Vocabulary : Day present, day absent , Behaviour - participant, Cooperation</i>

C / Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster …

D/ Teaching method

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up :

Brainstorming

- Ask Ss to write their ideas on the blackboard .
* Possible answers :

- Speak English to friends in class
- Watch English TV

- Do grammar exercises
- Read English stories

- Read English newspapers / magazines
- Listen to the English radio program

II/ Speak

1 / Pre - speaking : Introduce the topic of the
speaking .

- Call on some Ss to read the possible answers
above and copy down .

- Have Ss read the questions and words in the boxes.
2 / While – speaking

* Model :

Lan said she did her homework after dinner
<i> He / she said ………</i>

- Call on some pairs to read the model
- Ask Ss to work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class.
- Correct mistakes if any .

3 / Post - speaking :

- Ask Ss to write with information above .
Eg : Lan ,_{s elder brother helps him with his}
homework .

- Call on some Ss to read their writings .
III/ Listen

1 / Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the
listening and some new words :

* Pre – teach vocabulary :

Work in groups to play

games .

Read all the ways of
improving English .

Copy in their notebooks .

Listen and read the model ,
then copy

Work in pairs

Practice in front of class.
Work individually .
Read their writings
Copy down .

Listen and copy .

Listen and repeat in chorus
and individually .

Copy down .
<i><b>How to improve your </b></i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

- behavior (n) = cach cu sw

- A participant (n) = nguoi tham gia

- Satisfactory >< unsatisfactory (a) = thao mai
- cooperation (n) = hop tac

- attendance (n) =

- to appreciate = danh gia cao
* Checking : What and where
** Prediction :

- Ask Ss to look at Nga,_{s report and predict the}
missing information and then compare with their
partners .

a. day present (1)
b. Day absent (2)

c. Behavior – participant (3)
d. Listening (4)

e. Speaking (5)
f. Reading (6)
g. Writing (7)

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

2 / While - listening :
* Listen :

- Get Ss to listen to the tape and check their
prediction .

- Call on Ss to read their results and give feedback .
1. 87 days present

2. 5 days absent

3. participation : Spanish pronunciation
4. Listening : Comprehension

5. Speaking : A

6 . Reading : A 7 . Writing : B
* Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to answer some questions about Nga,_s
report card .

1. Who are Nga,_{s parents ?}

2. What is Nga,_{s teacher},_{s name ?}

3. What subject was reported ? For what term ?
4. What are the comments ?

5. What does S stand for ? What about F UA B CD ?
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and work in pairs
to answer the questions .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback .

3 / Post - listening : Survey

Questions You Your

partner
1. When do you do your

homework ?

2. Who helps you with your
homework ?

3. How much time do you spend
on Maths / English / History /
Literature ?

4. Which subject do you need to
improve ?

5. What do you do to improve
your English?

Play game

Predict and compare with their
partners .

Report their predictions .
Listen to the tape and check
their predictions

Read their results .

Work in pairs tom practice
asking and answering the
questions .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking their partners
questions and taking notes of the answers .

- Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 0r 5 to report what
they have known about their partners,_{study .}
- Correct mistakes if any .

V / Homework :

1. Copy the effective ways of learning English they
have found out .

2. Do exercises in workbook .

3. Write something about your partners,_{study habits}
Eg : Lan is my best friend . She works very hard and
always get good grades . she usually does her

homework after school
Prepare the next lesson .

Listen and copy .

<i> Ngµy 19 / 10 / 2009</i>

<i> </i>
<i> </i>

<i> WEEK 10 Preparing date: 15/ 10 / 2009</i>

Period 28 unit 5

Study habits
Lesson 4 : Read

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the text
<i>and get specific information .</i>

B/ Language content :

<i>- Vocabulary : Mother tongue, underline, hightlight, come across , stick - necessary,</i>
revise

C / Teaching aids :

Textbooks , cassette , chalks….
D/ Teaching method:

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Chatting
1. Do you like English ?

2. How many new words do you try to learn a day ?
3. What do you do when you read a new words ?
4. How do you learn / remember new words ?
- Call on Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions above .

- Correct and lead in the new lesson .
II / Pre - reading :

*Introduce the topic of the reading passage and
some new words .

- Mother tongue ( example )
- to underline ( example )
- to highlight ( example )
- to come across ( synonym )
- to stick ( mime )

* Checking : Slap the board
Brainstorming

Practice asking and
answering the question

Listen and copy .

Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of the ways
how a language learner can learn new words .

* Possible answers :
- Learn by heart

- Translate it into mother tongue

- Write each word on one piece of paper and put it
into the pocket to learn whenever

- Learn through example sentences

- Write it on small piece of paper and stick
everywhere in the house …….

III / While - reading :
1. True / False statements

- Ask Ss to read the statements , then read the text
and decide which is true and which is false .
( Page 50 )

- Call on Ss to read their answers and give feedback
a. F b. T c . F d . T

* Reading :

- Call on 2 or 3 Ss to read the passage aloud .
2. Comprehension questions

- Have Ss work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some Pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions

- Give feedback

a. No . They learn words in different ways .

b. Because they help them to remember the use of
new words .

c. They write examples , put the words and their
meanings on stickers , underline or highlight them .
d. They may think they can not do so . Instead , they
learn only important words .

e. Revision is necessary in learning words .
f. Learners should try different ways of learning
words t find out what is the best .

IV / Post - reading :
 Survey

- Ask Ss to work in groups to interview one another
and tick the ways they have used to learn new words

Ways of learning words Lan Hoa ...
1. Make a list of words , their

meanings and learn them by
heart .

2. Write sample sentences with
new words

3. Stick new words somewhere
in the house .

Work in pairs

Report and copy the
answers .

Work individually

Read the text aloud .

Practice asking and

answering the questions in
pairs .

Work in groups .

Copy down .
<i>Ways language </i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

4. Underline or highlight the
words .

5. Read stories in English .
6. Learn words through songs .

- Call on Ss to report about their groups .

Ex : Lan learns words by making a list of words ….
V / Homework :

1. Write the ways of learning words that you think
are the best for you .

2. Prepare the next lesson .

<i> </i>

P:28/10/10 Period 29

T: 8A,B-29 unit 5: Study habits

Lesson 4 : Write

I. Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know the format of a friendly letter
and practice writing a letter to a friend .

II. Language content :

<i>* Vocabulary : Lunar New Year Festival, enjoyable , celebrate, result </i>
<i>* Grammar : </i>

III. Teaching aids : Textbook , chalks , boards, Colored chalks ….
IV.Teaching method : Communitive approach

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

1. Warm up : Chatting

a. Have you ever written to someone ?
b. To whom do you usually write ?
c. What do you often write about ?
- Lead in new lesson .

2. Pre - writing :

Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words
to Ss .

- Lunar New Year Festival ( explanation )
- Enjoyable (adj ) = vui thu , thich thu
- to celebrate = ki niem

-> celebration (n)

* Checking : Rub out and remember

- Ask Ss to put the parts of the letter in the correct order
.

a. Opening d. Body of the letter
b. Closing e. Signature

c. The date f . Writer,_{s address .}
- Give feedback 1-f 2-c 3-a 4-d 5-b 6-e
- Ask Ss to read the letter to check their order .

- Ask Ss to label each section with the correct letter .
* Comprehension questions

- Have Ss work in pairs and answer some questions
a. Who wrote the letter ? To whom ?

b. What are there in the heading ?
c. What is the main part of the letter ?
d. What did Hoa receive a few days ago ?
e. What subject is Hoa good at ?

f. Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar New Year
Festival ?

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
in front of class .

3. While - writing :

- Ask Ss to imagine that they are Lan and write a letter
to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco , using the given
information .

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front
of class .

* Suggested letter :
<i>15 Quang Trung street </i>
<i>Hanoi , July 12 th , 2005 </i>
<i>Dear Donna </i>

<i>Thanks for your letter . I am glad to hear you had an </i>
<i>interesting Mother,_{s Day .}</i>

<i>We have received our second semester report last </i>
<i>month . I got good grades for Geography , Physics and </i>
<i>Math but my English and History results were poor . </i>
<i>My teacher advises me to improve English and History</i>
<i>. I think I have to study harder next school year . </i>

<i>In a few weeks , we are going to celebrate the mid </i>
<i>Autumn festival . That is an Autumn moon festival in </i>
<i>Vietnam . This afternoon , I am going to Ha Long Bay </i>
<i>with my aunt and uncle by bus and I am going to stay </i>
<i>ther with them until the festival comes . I will send you </i>
<i>a postcard from there . </i>

<i>Write soon and tell me all your news . </i>
<i>Best </i>

Play games

Listen and copy down

Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .

Copy down .
Play games .

Do the exercise individually .

Read and check .

Label each section with the
correct letter .

Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering the
questions .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<i>Lan , </i>

4. Post - writing : Correction

- Call on Ss to read aloud their letters and correct the
mistakes .

5. Homework :

- Write a letter to your friend to tell him / her about
your second semester report and about Summer holiday
.

-Be ready for L.f

Read their letters aloud .
Copy down .

<i> </i>

<i> </i>
P:31/10/10 Period 30

T:8A,B-1/11 unit 5: Study habits
Lesson 5 : Language focus

I. Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use adverbs of manner and modal
<i>Should as an advice , reported speech with commands , requests and advice .</i>

II. Language content :

<i>1. Vocabulary : sore throat , paint , replant </i>
<i>2. Grammar : + Adverbs of manner </i>

+ Modal verb : should as an advice
+ Reported speech

III. Teaching aids: Colored chalks, Text book , poster , ten cards
IV. Teaching method: Communitive approach

V. Procedure : 8A-
/8B-1. Warm up : Pelmanism

good warm bad fast badly

rode eat ate sit sat

- Explain the meanings and uses of them

+ Hard (a) and hard ( adv ) have different meanings
2. Consolidation and Practice

1) Adverbs of manner .

- Setting the scene “ Use any word from the game Pelmanism to
complete the following sentences “

* Form : S + V + a / an + adjective + noun
or : S + be + Adjective

S + V + adverb

* Use : Adj modifies the noun after it / the subject
Adv modifies the verb of the sentence .

<i>Exercise 1 / 52 : Complete the dialogues </i>

- Ask Ss to work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class
- Give feedback .

<i>1. hard 2. fast 3. badly 4. softly</i>
- Ask ss to practice the dialogue in open pairs .
2) Modal : Should

- Ask Ss to look at Mr Hao,_{s house and answer some questions}

Play games

Listen and copy down

Work in pairs

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

a. Is his house new ?
b. Is the wall discolored ?
c. How is the door ?

d. Is there grass in his garden ?
e. Should Mr Hao repair the roof ?
Suggested answers :

a. No , it isn,_{t b. Yes , it is c. It is broken}

d. Yes. There is lots of grass in his garden.
e. Yes, he should .

-> Explain the modal “ Should “
+ Form : S + Should + infinitive
+ Use : give advice

+ Meaning : nen ( lam gi )
<i>Exercise 2 / 52 </i>

Give Ss the question “ What should he do with his house ?
 mend ? / paint ? / replant ? / cut ? / repair ?

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to use the verbs to advise Mr Hao what
to do .

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the
question “ What should he do with his house ? “

- Give feedback .

a. Mr Hao should repair the roof .
b…………...paint the house
c. ………...cut the grass .
d. ………...replant the tree
e. ………….mend the door

3) Commands , requests in reported speech
- Explain the form of the reported speech :
* Form :

To ask / tell + someone + to do something
+ Example :

a. “ Can you give Tim this dictionary ? “

=> Mr Jackson asked me to give you this dictionary
b. “ Please give Tim this dictionary . “

=> Miss Jackson told me to give you this dictionary
<i>Exercise 3 / 53 : Explain the situation to Ss </i>

- Have Ss work in pairs to do exercise .

- Call on some pairs to read their answers aloud , then go to the
board to write them on .

- Give feedback

a. Miss Jackson asked me to wait for her outside her office .
b. Miss Jackson told me to give you your report card for this
semester .

c. Miss Jackson asked me to help you with your Spanish
pronunciation .

d. Miss Jackson told me to meet her next week .
- Call on some Ss to practice is pairs and correct their
pronunciations .

4) Advice in reported speech
- Explain the form of it

* Form : S + said ( that ) + S + should + V ...

Example : Miss Jackson said , “ Tim should work harder on his
Spanish pronunciation . “

=> Miss Jackson said you should work harder on your Spanish
pronunciation .

<i>Exercise 4 / 53 </i>

- Ask Ss to work with their partners .

Practice asking and
answering the
questions .

Listen and give
examples .

Practice in pairs

Practice in pairs in front
of class .

Listen and copy .

Read the examples

aloud .

Work in pairs

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

- Call on some Ss to practice in pairs and correct pronunciation .
- Give feedback

a. Miss Jackson said you should spend more time on Spanish
pronunciation .

b. Miss Jackson said you should practice speaking Spanish every
day .

c . Miss Jackson said you should listen to Spanish conversation
on TV .

d. Miss Jackson you should practice reading aloud passage in
Spanish .

e. Miss Jackson said you should use this dictionary to find out
how to pronounce Spanish words .

3. Further practice

- Ask students to complete the dialogue

Miss Jackson: (1)_______ you give Tim this (2)__________.
Tim's mother: Yes (3)______(4)______.Thanks a lot.

Miss Jackson: His grades are (5)_________. But he
(6)________ work harder on his Spanish(7)________.
4. Consolidation

-Remind adverbs of manner; modal should ; Commands,
requests, and advice in reported speech.

5. Homework :

- Review command , requests and advice in Reported Speech .
- Copy all the exercises in their notebooks.

- Prepare the next lesson .

Some Ss come to the
board to write them on

Copy and read the
examples aloud .
Work in pairs

Practice in closed pairs
and open pairs .

- Complete the dialogue
(1) Can

(2) dictionary
(3) of (4) course

(5) good

(6) should
(7) pronuciation
- Listen

Listen and copy .
<i> </i>

<i> </i>

<i> Ngµy 26 / 10 / 2009</i>

<i> Week 11</i> <i> </i>

<i> </i>
* The aims

Help students:

- To talk about the future

- To ask for for and offer assistance

- To write a letter telling about the futeru plan.
* Language content

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

- Present simple with future meaning.

- Gerund.

- Modal: may, can, could.
B/ Vocabulary

To enroll, to fill out, recycle, to tutor, to unite, application, citizenship, drawing, fund,
interest, position, resources, scout, tire, academic, co-educational.

* Unit allocation:

- Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read.
- Lesson 2: Speak + Listen

- Lesson 3: Read
- Lesson 4: Write

- Lesson 5: Language Focus.

Period 31

Unit 6:The young pioneers club
lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and read

I Aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue about the
<i>young pioneers . </i>

B/ Language content
<i>I/ Grammar : Gerund </i>

<i>II Vocabulary : enroll , application, form , outdoor , activities, fill , sign</i>
C / Teaching aids : Textbook , 5 cards for drill , Cassette

D/ Teaching method :

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Chatting

Ask Ss some questions about their activities and
their summer holidays .

1.What do you often do on your summer holiday?
2. Are you members of the Young Pioneers and

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

Youth Organization ?

3. Are there any activity programs for the summer
?

4. Do you take part in them ?
5. What activity do you like most ?

II / Presentation : Introduce the topic of the lesson
and some new words to Ss .

*Vocabulary :

- to enroll ( translation )

- Answer application form ( visual )

- Out door activities : Games that you play in the
open air rather than in a building or a house such
as : football , tennis ..

- Hobby (n)
- Acting (n)

* Checking : Rub out and remember
III/ Practice

- Set the scene “ Nga is a student in grade eight .
She wants to enroll in the activities for the

summer . “

- Ask Ss to listen and read the dialogue at the
same time .

- Get Ss to work in pairs and complete Nga,_s
particulars .

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of
class.

- Give feedback

+Name : Pham Thi Nga

+Home address : 5 Tran Phu Street
+ Phone number : Not available
+ Date of birth : April 22 , 1989
+ Sex : Female

+ Interest : Drawing , outdoor , activities , acting
- Ask Ss some questions :

+ What is her name ?
+ What does she live ?
+ When was she born ?
+ What are her hobbies ?

- Call on some Ss to answer the questions .
* Concept checking

- What is after “ likes “ ? -> drawing
- What is after “ enjoys “ ? -> acting

- What do you call “ drawing “ and “ acting “ ->
gerund

- What is the form of “ gerund “ ? -> V- ing
- When do we use “ gerund “ ? - > after some
verbs : like , love , enjoy , hate , mind .

* Form Like , love , enjoy , hate + gerund

* Drill : word cue drill

- Prepare 5 cards with these cues on them :
a. play soccer / volley ball

b. watch TV / listen to music
c. read books / do homework

d. Chat with friends / do the housework
e. Cook meal / decorate the house .
=> What are your hobbies ?

I like / love playing soccer and volleyball .

Listen and repeat in chorus
and individually , then copy .

Play game

Listen to the tape

Read the dialogue
Work in pairs

Report their results in front
of class.

Answer the questions
( whole class )

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

- Call on Ss to practice asking and answering
- Correct mistakes if any .

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
IV / Consolidation Survey

- Ask Ss to copy down the chart and work in
groups of three to ask their friends and tick on the
chart .

Do you like name / Nam Mai
love like don,_t

hate like love like don
,_t
hate like
- play soccer

- washing up
- cooking
meals

- performing
music

- gathering
broken
glasses

- watching
TV

- play
badminton

- Give feedback by asking Ss to report their
friends,_{hobbies .}

V / Homework :

1. Write about their friend,_{s hobbies .}
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Practice reading the dialogue
in pairs .

Work in groups

Listen and copy .

<i> </i>
<i> </i>

Period 32 Preparing date: 25 / 10 / 2009
Unit 6

The young pioneers club
Lesson 2 : Speak + LISTEN

A/ Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask for favors and
<i>respond to favors . offer and respond to assistance </i>

<i> By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to complete a song for details </i>
B/ Language content :

<i>I/ Vocabulary : Carry, burt. That's very kind of you, Certainly </i>
unite , make a stand , Hold

<i>II/ Grammar : Can/ Could you do me a favor?</i>
May I help you?

C/ Teaching aids : Coloured chalks, Cassette player
D/ Teaching method :

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<i>Prep</i>
<i>a</i> <i>ring</i>
<i>date:</i>
<i>25 /</i>
<i>10 /</i>
<i>2009</i>
I / Warm up : Shark,_{s attack}

- Cut out a shark and a school girl / boy from card
- Draw some steps , then stick the cut out girl /
boy on the top of the steps , the sharks in the sea .
- Draw 5 gaps for the word – favor

II / Speak

1) Pre-speaking

- Ask Ss the meanings of the word FAVOR
+ What do you say to ask for a favor ?
Can you help me ?

Could you do me a favor ?
Can / Could you ………..?
+ When do you ask for favor ?
Need some help

+ How do you say to respond to favor ?
Certainly / Of course / sure

No problem

+ What does the receptionist say ?
May I help you ?

+ What is for ?

For offering assistance

+ another way to offer assistance ?

Do you need any help ? / Let me help you .
+ How do you say to respond to assistance ?
Yes . No , thank you .

- Ask Ss to copy down the following phrases
Asking for favor Responding for favor
* Can / Could you

help me please ?
* Could you do
me a favor ?
* I need a favor
* Can / could
you ..?

* Certainly / of course /
sure

* No problem

* What can I do for you ?
* How can I help you ?
* I am sorry . I am really
busy

Offering

assistance Responding to assistance
* May I help

you ?

* Do you need
any help ?

* Let me help you
.

* Yes / No . Thank you
* Yes . That is very kind of
you .

* No . thank you . I am
fine .

I can
manage .

- Ask Ss to repeat chorally and then individually
all the phrases in the chart .

2) While- speaking

* Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogues
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Correct pronunciation if any .

* Use appropriate phrases to make similar

dialogues about some of the following situations
with a partner.

- Have Ss work in pairs .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback

3) Post-speaking :

Situation : A receptionist wants to help a tourist
who needs to go to the nearest bank

Receptionist : ………?

Tourist : yes . Can you ………..?

Receptionist : Sure . Turn right when you get out

Play game

Listen and practice asking
and answering the

questions

Listen and copy

Repeat chorally ,
individually
Work in pairs

Work in pairs

Closed pairs

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

Period 33 Unit 6

The young pioneers club
lesson 3 : Read

A/ Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about
<i>a youth organization </i>–<i> the Boy Scouts of America ( BSA ) </i>

<i> B/ Language content : </i>

<i>- Vocabulary : encourage, citizenship, coeducational , voluntary, lead. establish </i>
<i>- Grammer : </i>

C/ Teaching aids : Coloured chalk ,Text book , Poster of T /F statements
D/Teaching method Communitive approach

E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Jumbled words

- Write six words whose letters are in disorder
1. Racchtaer 4. Pexainl

2. Iojn 5 . Nessmsibuan
3. Mai 6 . Thauolgh

- Ask Ss to work in 2 teams and call on 6 Ss from h

team write the right words on the board .

1. Character 2. Join 3. Aim
4. Explain 5. Businessman 6. Although

II / Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the reading
passage and some new words to Ss .

- to encourage : give the verb which means to give
Sb support

- Citizenship (n) = quyen cong dan
- coeducational (a) ( translation )
- Voluntary (a) = tu y , tu nguyen
- to lead – led – led

- to establish = to start / to create an organization
* Checking : Slap the board

- Stick the poster with the statements on the

blackboard and guess which is true , which is false .
a. The Boy Scout of America is a youth

organization

b. Scouting began in America

c. William Boyce is a businessman in LOndon .
d. Boys and girls can join BSA

e. The Scouting Association is the biggest voluntary
youth organization in the world .

- Call on Ss to report their predictions and write
them on the board

III / While - reading :
1. Reading :

- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books
at the same time to read the passage to check their
predictions

- Call on some Ss to read their results aloud and
give feedback :

a. T b. F c. F d. F e. T
- Have them correct false statements .
b. Scout began in England

c. William Boysce is an American business man .
d. BSA is mainly for boys .

- Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud .

Work in teams

Listen and copy

Repeat chorally ,
individually .
Play game

Work in groups to predict .

Report their predictions
Listen to the tape and read
the passage to check their
predictions

Read their results .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

- Correct mistakes if any .
2. Fill in the missing dates

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to do exercise 1 / 57
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class
- Give feedback :a.1907 b. 1909 c. 1910 d. 1994
3. Answer :

- Have Ss work in pairs to practice asking
answering the questions .

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class
- Give feedback

a. Scouting began in England in 1907

b. The meeting between a boy scout and Mr

William Boyce led the Scouts Association crossing
the Atlantic in 1910 .

c. Girls can join in the Girls Guides Association
and Camp Fire Boys and girls .

d. They are building characters , good citizenship
and personal fitness .

IV / Post - reading : Interview a member of the
Boys Scouts of American

- Call on an excellent student in class to practice
with the teacher .

- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs

Interview Member of BSA

1. When did
scouting begin ?
2. When were the
aims established ?
3. Can a girl join the
BSA ?

4 . How many

members does the
Scouting

Association have
now ?

5. Is it the largest
voluntary Youth
Organization in the
world ?

- In 1907 in England
- They were established in
1907 . They are building
the characters , good
citizenship and personal
fitness .

- No , It is mainly for boys
but girls can join similar
organization such as the
Girl Guides Association or
the Coeducational Camp
fire Boys and Girls .
Over 25 million
- Yes, Of course

V / Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words and write the

summary of the BSA

2. Prepare the next lesson

exercise

Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering the
questions .

Work in open pairs

Listen and copy

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

WEEK 12 Preparing date: 30/10/2009

Period 34 Unit 6

The young pioneers club
Lesson 4 : Writing

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letter about
<i>a future plan using be going to </i>

B/ Language content

<i>Vocabulary : raise fund, bank (n), natural recourees, coul, iron, oil .... under the sea,</i>
recycle, sidewalk

C/ Teaching aids

Text book , chalk , board, coloured chalks
D/ Teaching method : Communitive approach
E/ Procedure :

I / Warm up : Revision of the structure Be going to
- Ask Ss the usage of “ be going to “ – to express a
future plan .

- Get Ss to make the sentence :

“ I am going to + Verb “ ( The verbs have to begin
with a letter from A to Z

Ex: T : I am going to accept their invitation .
S1 : I am going to buy a new bicycle
S2 : I am going to clean the floor .
S3 : I am going to dust the furniture ..

II / Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing
and some new words to Ss .

- to raise fund ( translation )
- a bank ( visual )

- natural resources : coal oil , iron .. under the
ground or the sea .

- Ask Ss to read the notice “ To : All Y and Y
members of the school “

- Ask some questions to check their understanding
a. What do members of the Y and Y have to do in
the recycling program ?

Play game

Listen and copy

Listen and repeat chorally
and individually

Copy down

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

b. What is the purpose of the recycling program ?
c. What other programs can members of the Y and Y
participate in ?

- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .
- Give feedback and ask them to practice in open
pairs .

- Ask some questions to set the scene :
* Who writes the letter ? ( Nga )

* To whom does Nga write ? ( Linh )

* Is Nga a member of Y and Y ? ( Yes )

* What does Nga write to Linh about ? ( She writes
about the programs of her school Y and Y that she is
going to participate )

- Get Ss to work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the
letter .

- Give feedback :1. community 2.recycling 3.collect
4. send 5. recycling 6. save 7. raise / earn

8. participating 9. planting 10 . helping
- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter and
correct mistakes if any .

* Reading the dialogue :

- Set the scene “ Hoa talks to her aunt about the Y
and Y Green Group , about the activities that she is
going to do .”

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her
aunt .

* Checking : some questions :
a. Why does Hoa look happy ?

b. What is she going to do in the environment
month ?

c. What are they doing to earn money for their
school Y&Y ?

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate their answers in
front of the class .

III / While - writing :

- Ask Ss to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents .
- Get Ss to work in group of 4 or 5 to write a letter on
poster .

- Move around the class and help then if they are
necessary .

IV/ Post - writing :

- Choose four letters from 4 group and stick them on
the board

- Get the whole class to read the 4 letters and correct
them .

- Give feedback : Suggested letter
Dear Mom and Dad ,

I am very happy to tell you that I am able to join in
the Y & Y Green Group of my school .

The green Group is holding an environment month
plan . We are going to clean the lakes,_{banks on}
weekends . We are also going to plant trees and
flowers in the parks and water them every afternoon
after class . We are planting young trees and plants
to sell to other schools .

I hope that we can bring more green to the city and
earn some money for the school Y&Y . The program

Practice asking and

answering the questions in
pairs

Listen and answer
( the whole )

Work in pairs to complete
the letter .

Read the complete letter .
Listen and copy .

Practice asking and
answering the questions .

Work in groups to write the
letter

Stick their letters on the
board and correct its
mistakes

Read the suggested letter
aloud

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

is very interesting and useful , isn't it ?

I am still in a very good health . I will tell you more
about the group activities later .

With love ,
Hoa .

V / Homework :

1. Ask each student to help Hoa write a letter to her
parents in their notebooks .

Preparing date: 30/10/2009
Period 35 Unit 6

The young pioneers club
LEsson 5 : language focus

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present with
<i>future meaning / Gerunds / modals : may , can , could .</i>

B/ Language content :

<i>Vocabulary : a rest home, orphanage </i>
<i>Grammar : </i> Tense , gerund , modal verbs

C/ Teaching aids : Textbook , chalk , board, coloured chalks
D/ Teaching method:

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Brainstorming
*Possible answers :

- <i>Clean up the streets </i>
- <i>Help elderly people </i>
- <i>Take part in sports</i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

- <i>Collect and empty garbage </i>…..
II / Revision and practice :

1. Revision

a) Present tense to talk aboutfuture activities/
events

Teacher explains: we use simple present tense to
express an action that happens in the future.
b) Gerunds :

* Form : Like , love , enjoy , hate + Ving
* Survey :

- Ask Ss to work in groups of three to ask their
friends and stick on the chart .

- Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends,
hobbies .

Eg : Ba loves playing soccer . He does not like
cooking and especially hate washing dishes . ..
c) Modals : may , can , could

- Ask Ss to repeat the uses of the offering assistance
, asking for favors and how to respond .

2. Practice

- Work with a partner. Ask and answer question
about Y&Y Spring activity program.

- a ret home : a place where old or sick people are
cared for

- an orphanage : a place where children without

parents live

- a stadium ( picture )

Setting the scene : Introduce the dialogue “ Lan
and Mai are members of the Y&Y organization .
They are talking about the summer activity
program”

Lan : …(1…….we collect and empty garbage ?
Mai : at Dong Xuan Market .

Lan : …..(2)…….. we collect ……(3)………?
Mai : On January 9

Lan : ………(4)…….. we start and ……(5)…..?
Mai : ……..(6) …… 8 am and ……(7) … 5 pm .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue .
- Call on some pairs to play the role of Lan and mai
to practice the dialogue .

- Give feedback

1. where do 2. when do 3. an empty garbage
4. what time do 5. finish 6. we start at 7. finish at
c. Concept checking :- Ask Ss some questions to
check their understanding

a. When do we use “ where “ ?
b. When do we use “ when “ ?

c. When do we use “ what time “ ?
d. Is the date at present or in the future ?
e. What tense do we use in the dialogue ?
=> We use simple present tense to express an
action that happens in the future .

- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about the
Y&Y activity by using the following cues

Listen and copy .

Work in groups of three or
four

Report their results .
Repeat the uses of the “
Asking for favors / offering
assistance and how to
respond

Listen and repeat chorally ,
individually

Copy down
Play game
Listen carefully

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .

- Give feedback

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in
front of the class .

- Give feedback

a /A : Can you buy a ticket for me ?
B : Can you take me across the road ?

C : Could you help me with this math problem ?
D : Can you water the flowers in the garden?
b / A : May I help you ?

A : Do you need any help ?
B : Let me help you .

A : Yes . That is very kind of you .

- Ask them to practice the dialogue in front of the
class .

III/ Further practice

Exercise: Match column A to column B
A

1. Hello, Mai!

2.What are you doing here, Mai?

3.Let me get an application form for you.
4. Do you want to fill it in for you?

5. Certainly. How can I help you?
6. No problem.

IV/ Consolidation

-Remind the present tense with future meaning,
gerunds and modals

IV / Homework :

1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks .
2. Write about their friends' hobbies.

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Practice asking and

answering to draw the form

Copy down .

Practice asking and
answering the questions
about the Y&Y activity .
Practice speaking the

dialogue

B

a.I'm enrolling for an English
course.

b.Hello, Nam

c.Can you lend me your pen?
d.Thanks. That's very kind of
you, Nam.

e.Thanks again,Nam . You
are very kind

f. No .Thank you. I'm fine. I
can fill it in. Oh,but could
you do me a favor?

Listen and copy .

<i> Preparing date: 30/10/2009</i>
Period 36 REVISION

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

- Past simple

- Prepositions of time

- Used to

- Commands, request and advice in reported speech
- Gerunds

- Present tense with future meaning
C/ Teaching aids : Coloured chalks
D/ Teaching method :

Communitive approach
E/ PROCEDURES :

<i> Teacher's activities</i> Student's activities

I/ Warm up :

-Divide the class into 2 teams

- Ask them to write the verbs in the past

1. Know 2. Hold 3. Keep 4. See
5. Take 6. slow 7. Buy 8. Hang
9. Write 10. Read

II/ Revision and practice
1. Revision

a) The simple past tense
+ Form

+ The use: express an action happened in the past
b) The simple past tense with "used to"

+ Form: S + used to + V- infinitive

Use: used to express a past habit, or an action
usually happened in the past

c) Prepositions of time: in ,on, at, between, after,
before.

d) Adverbs of manner .

- Setting the scene “ Use any word from the game
Pelmanism to complete the following sentences “
* Form : S + V + a / an + adjective + noun

or : S + be + Adjective
S + V + adverb

* Use : Adj modifies the noun after it / the subject
Adv modifies the verb of the sentence
e) Commands , requests in reported speech
- Explain the form of the reported speech :
* Form :

To ask / tell + someone + to do something
f) Advice in reported speech

- Explain the form of it

* Form : S + said ( that ) + S + should + V ...
2.Practice

-Have students exercises

_Exercise 1:Supply the correct form of the verbs
1. You ( meet) her last night ?

2. They ( build) a new housetwo years ago
3. The film ( start ) at 7 p.m to 8.30 p.m ?
4. Lan (write) at present ?

5. He ( come) here tonight

-Divide the class into 2 teams
-Write the verbs in the past

- Listen and write down.

Keys :

1. Did ... meet ?
2.built

3. Starts

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

6. There (be) a hotel near my house

-Exercise2:

1. I'll visit you ...Saturday

2.We must be there ...8.30 and 9.10

3.The shop closes ...4 p.m. If you
arrive ... 4p.m, it will be closed

4. My birthday is ...May 20
5. She was born ...January
6. I have dinner ...6.pm

-Exercise 3: Change the sentence into reported
speech

1. The teacher said to Tim : "Come into my
office,please"

2. Mrs Jackson said to Tim : " Could you give me a
hand please"

3. Nam said to the taxi driver : "Please turnleft at the
firts traffic light"

4. Mary said to Tom : " Can you carry my suitcase,
please?"

III/ Further practice

- Ask student to do the exercises

Exercise1: Supply the correct form of the verbs
1. The boys like (play) games but hate (do) lesson.
2. Please stop (talk); I (try) (finish) Aletter to the Y
& Y Green Group.

3. His doctor advised him (give up) (smoke).

4. By (work) day and night he suceed in ( finish) the
job in time.

5. There (be) many volunteers in Sea games 22nd in
Viet Nam.

-Exercise2: Rewrite the sentences
1. I walk slowly.

I

2. He is a good singer
He

3. She teaches English excellenly.
She

4. They work very hard.
They

5. You are a good listener.
You

IV/ Consolidation

- Remind all the structures they are learnt.
V/ Homework

-Do the exercises
- Preparing for the test.

6. is

Keys : 1. on 2. between
3. before

4. in 5. in 6. at

Keys

1. The teacher told Tim to
come into her office

2.Mrs Jackson told/asked Tim
to give her a hand

3. Nam told the taxi driver to
turn left at ....

4. Mary asked John to carry
her suitcase

- Do exercises
1. playing- doing

2. talking- I'm trying- to
finish

3. to give up- smoking
4. working- finishing
5.are

1. I am a slow walker.
2. He sings well.

3. She is an excellent English
teacher.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

Ngµy 09/ 11/ 2009

Preparing date: 10 / 11/2009
WEEK 13

Period 37 THE SECOND TEST 45 MINUTES

A / Aims and Objectives : Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have
<i>learnt to do the test well. </i>

B / Teaching aids : Papers , chalks and boards .
C / Test :

I / Choose the best answers to fill in the gaps

1. Some people ……….. a list of new words in a notebook to learn them ( do/ make out/
get).

2.We are all happy when we get………..our subjects (grades good for/ grades good
with/ good grades for ).

3.I think it is really good to spend time…………English ( learning/ to learn/ on
learning )

4. Miss Jackson told him to………….his Spanish pronunciation ( make/ improve/ need/
believe in ).

5. Yesterday she received Tim's…………..from his teacher (report call/ report card/ card
report/ call report ).

6. Learns should try……….... the best way for themselves ( find out/ to find out/
finding out ).

II/ Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense or forms
1.He doesn't enjoy ………( write ) letters.

2. His doctor advised him………( give up )………( smoke ).
3. All the students in our group love………( play ) games in free time.
4. Next Monday………( be ) eighteenth.

5. Please stop………( talk ); I'm trying to finish a letter.

III/ Rewrite the following sentences without changing their meanings.
1. "Study hard for the coming exam", she said

She asked me………

2."Don't speak aloud", Lan said to me.

Lan told me………

3. Nam is a good football player.

Nam plays………..

4."Will you bring me a cup of tea ?", he said

He asked me ……….

5." You should do morning exercises everyday", Lam said

Lam said that……….

IV/ Read the passage then answer the questions.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

told me to wait for her outside the classroom. She took me to the school library and
showed me cassettes of pronunciation drills kept in a glass bookcase. She also told me

how to use an English- English dictionary to improve my English Grammar " Now I
think you know what you should do", she said. I made much progress and only one year
later I won the first prize in the English- speaking contest held for secondary school
students in my hometown.

1. What difficulties did Nam have in learning English in the 1st year ?
a. The pronunciation b. The grammar c. Both a& b
2. Who wanted to meet him one afternoon after the lesson?

a. His friend b. His mother c. His teacher

3. Where did they go after that?

a. To the art library b. To the town library c. To the school library
4. What did the teacher show him then?

a. Cassettes of the pronunciation drills b. English-English dictionary c. Botha&b
5. What prize did he win in the English Speaking contest one year later?

a. The second prize b. The first prize c. The third prize
V/ Write full sentences with the suggested words

This is a plan of the Y & Y Green groups
1. We / having/ environment month.

………..

2. We / going/ clean/ the banks of the lakes/ weekends

………..

3. We / going / plant/ trees and flowers/ the school garden/ water/ every afternoon/
class.

………...

4.We/ also/ going/ collect/ used glass/ paper and cans.

……….

VI/ Listen and choose the best responses
1) A.Hi! Please to meet you.

B. Thanks a lot!

2) A. The people are very nice
B. No, this is my second time.
3) A. They're very beautiful
B. It's very beautiful
4) A. About two weeks
B. Next Monday

<i>Preparing date: 10 / 11/2009</i>
Period 38 CORRECTING THE TEST

I/ Choose the best answers to fill in the gaps ( 1,5 pts - 0,25/a correct word)

1. make 2. good grades for 3. learning

4. improve 5. repord card 6. to find out

II/ Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense or form (1,5 pts-0,25/a corrects)
1. He doesn't enjoy writing letters

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

3. All the students in our group love playing games in free time
4. Next Monday will be eighteenth.

5. Please stop talking; I'm trying to finish a letter.

<i> III/ Rewrite the following sentences without changing their meanings (1,5 pts- 0,3/ a </i>
correct )

1. She asked me to study hard for the coming exam.
2. Lan told me tospeak aloud.

3. Nam plays football well.

4. He asked me to bring him a cup fo tea.

5. Lam said that I should do morning exercises everyday.

IV/ Read the passage then answer the questions ( 2pts- 0,4/ a corrects)

1-c 2-c 3-c 4--a 5-b

V/ Write the full sentences with the suggested words (2 pts-0,5/ a corrects)
1. We are having an environment month.

2. We are going to clean the banks of the lakes on weekends.

3. We are going to plant trees and flowers in the school garden and water them every
afternoon after class.

4. We are also going to collect used glass, paper and cans.
VI/ Listen and choose the best responses

Preparing date: 10 / 11/2009
Period 39

Unit 7
My neighborhood
Lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read

A/ Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson . Ss will be able to know more about
<i>Na,_{s new neighbor .}</i>

B/ Language content:

<i>Vocabulary : close by, serve , tasty , wet market , hairdresser's . grocery store </i>
<i>Grammar : </i> Present perfect tense

C/Teaching aids: Picture in texbook, Cassette player
D/ Teaching method :

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Getting started

- Ask Ss to match the names of places with the
suitable pictures

- Ask for their meanings to make sure Ss know
exactly what they mean

* Answers :

a. grocery store b. stadium
c. wet market d. drug store
e. hairdresser,_{s f. swimming pool}
II / Presentation :

Introduce the topic of the passage reading and
some new words

- close by (adv) : a short distance

Play game
( whole class )

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

- to serve : give sb food or drink

- a pancake : banh ran

- tasty (a) = delicious (a)

* Checking vocabulary : What and where
*. Guiding questions :

- Set the scene “ Nam and Na are talking about the
place where they live . But Na is new there . “
Questions :

a. How long has Nam lived in that neighborhood ?
b. Where does Na want to go ?

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and predict the
answers and call on some Ss to read their
predictions and write them on the board .
III / Practice

1. Ask Ss to read silently the dialogue between
Nam and Na then ask them if their answers are
correct or not .

- Give feedback :

a. He has lived there for 10 years .
b. Na wants to go to a restaurant .

2. Ask Ss to do the exercise 2 / 64 individually ,
then compare with their partners .

- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give
feedback

a. new b. last week c. tired
d. restaurant e. Hue f. pancakes
3. Answers given :

- Give Ss some answers and ask them to make
questions .

a. Nam has lived here for 10 years .
b. Yes. my mother is too tired to cook .
c. The restaurant serves Hue food .
d. Hue food is very good.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking and
answering

=> Questions

a. How long has Nam lived here ?
b. Is Na,_{s mother tired ?}

c. What kind of food does the restaurant serve ?
d. What is the food like ?

IV / Consolidation

- Ask Ss to write a passage about their

neighborhood by answering the following
questions

aHow long have you lived in your neighborhood ?
b. Do you like it ? Why ?

c . Is there a restaurant / post – office / market /
bank / shop in your neighborhood ?

d.How do you do to keep your neighborhood
clean ?

- Move around the class and help Ss

- Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud .
- Correct mistakes .

V / Homework :

1. Write the complete writing about their
neighborhood .

2. Do exercise in workbook .

Listen and repeat chorally ,
individually

Copy down
Play game

Listen to the scene and
work in groups to predict
the answers to the guiding
questions .

Report their predictions .
Read the dialogue to check
their predictions

Work individually

Work in pairs to practice
asking and answering the
questions

Open pairs -> closed pairs

Write individually

Demonstrate their writings
in front of class.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

3. Prepare the next lesson .

<i>Ngµy 16 / 11 / 2009</i>

WEEK 14 <i>Preparing date: 15 / 11 /2009</i>

Period 40 Unit 7

My neighborhood
lesson 2 : speak + LISTEN

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk how to send
<i>parcels or letters .</i>

<i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know what Na is going to do on the weekend </i>
<i>by listening</i>

B/ Language content :

<i>Vocabulary : air mail, surface mail , change, send , Contest, Newcomer, Town Ground,</i>
culture House

<i>Grammar : - S + want + to V</i>
- S+ have to V

- How much……….?

C / Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalk , board, Cassette player .
D/ Teaching method : Communitive approach

E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Chatting

- Show a letter and ask Ss some questions
+ What is this ?

+ Where can I post it to my friend ?
+ How can I post it ?

+ How much ?

+ Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ?
+ Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ?

 Lead in the new lesson .
II / Speak :

1) Pre-speaking

- air – mail : letter or parcel sent by air

- surface mail : letter or parcel sent by bus , train or
ship …

- charge (v / n )

* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember
* Reading comprehension

- Set the scene “ Mrs Kim wants to send a parcel to
Qui Nhon , so she has to go to the post office .”
- Give Ss some questions and ask Ss to work in
pairs to compare their answers .

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find out the

answers

a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel airmail or surface
mail ? Why ?

b. What is the weight of her parcel ?
c. How much does she pay ?

- Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions

Play game
( whole class )

Listen and repeat
chorally , individually
Copy down

( whole class )
Play game

Listen carefully .
Work in pairs

Read the dialogue to fine
out the answers .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

* Answers :

a. Mrs Kim send the parcel surface mail because it
is much cheaper .

b. Her parcel is five kilograms .
c. She pays 19, 200 dongs .
2) While-speaking :

- Call on a student to play role of Mrs Kim and
practice the dialogue with teacher ( clerk )
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue .
Correct their pronunciation

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in
front of class .

3) Post-speaking

- Set the scene and ask Ss to make the dialogue
1. Mrs Lan wants to post a letter air mail

- Ask Ss to make the dialogue between Lan and the
clerk in the post office .

- Elicit and encourage Ss to make the dialogue
themselves .

Expected dialogue
Clerk : Can I help you ?

Mrs Lan : I want to send a letter to Kontum .

Clerk : Do you want to send it airmail or surface
mail ?

Mrs Lan : I send it airmail . How much is it ?
Clerk : Let me see . Mmm , 15 grams , it is only
1,200 dongs .

Mrs Lan : Here you are .
Clerk : Thank you .

- Get Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs
- Give Ss some situations :

2. Postcard / HCM city / airmail / 15 g
3. Parcel / Ca Mau ? air mail / 2 kg

4. Parcel / Buon Me Thuot / surface / 5 kgs .
- Divide class into 3 groups , each prepares a
dialogue

- Call on 2 pairs from each group to practice their
dialogue .

- Get Ss to work in pairs , practicing three dialogues
and move around class to help Ss .

III/ Listen

1) Pre - listening :

- Set the scene “ Na is new in the neighborhood .
She is talking to Nam about what she is going to do
on the weekend .”

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and give the
answers and fill in the blanks in each advertisement
2) While - listening :

- Let Ss listen to the tape twice and give the
answers

- Give feedback

a. The new comer b. Town Ground
c. English speaking contest d . Culture House
- Ask Ss to read the statements in the exercises 2/66
- Get Ss to guess which is true , which is false
which has no information

- Ask Ss to share their ideas with their friends .

answering the questions .

Practice the dialogue with
teacher .

Work in open pairs
Work in closed pairs .

Practice the dialogues ,
using the situations .
( whole class )

Work in pairs

Work in groups
Work in open pairs
Work in closed pairs
Listen and copy .

Listen and copy

Work individually

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

- Give feedback

- Let Ss listen to the conversation again n and tick
in the correct boxes : True ? False or No

information

Statements T F No

a. Na does not know the b
neighborhood very well
b. Na does not like movies
c. Na will go to the photo

exhibition this weekend
d. Na will not go to the
English speaking Contest
e. Na will go to the soccer
match with Nam

f. Nam is a soccer fan .

X

X
X

X
X

X
- Ask Ss some questions to check their

understanding of the conversation .
- Turn on the tape again .

a. Does Na like movies ?

b. Why will not she go to see the film “ The New
comer “ ?

c. Why will not Na go to the photo exhibition ?
d. Who will Na go to the soccer match with ?
e. What time does the match start ?

3) Post - Listening :

- Ask Ss to work in groups to talk to their friends
about what Na is going to do this weekend .
- Call on some volunteers from each group to tell
the whole class about Na .

V / Homework :

1. Copy the three dialogues in their notebooks
2. Write a short passage about what Na is going to
do .

3. Do exercises in workbook .
4. Prepare the next lesson .

Practice asking and
answering the questions .
( whole class )

Work in group

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

Period 41 <i>Preparing date: 15 / 11 /2009</i>

Unit 7
My neighborhood
lesson 3 : Read

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the
<i>passage about a new shopping Mall </i>

B / Language content :

<i>Vocabulary : roof , selection , avaiable , mall , resident</i>
<i>Grammar : </i> Present perfect tense

C / Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , chalk , board , pictures
D/ Teaching method : Communitive approach

E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Guessing the words

- Give Ss the definitions and get Ss to find out the
words as quickly as possible .

1. a place where you can buy everything

2. A place where you can buy vegetables and fruit .
3. A place where you can buy books .

4. A place where you can come to eat .

5. A place where you can come to see the movies .
6. A person who comes to the store and buys
something .

=> Lead in the new lesson
II / Pre - reading :

Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some
new words to Ss :

1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- a roof ( picture )

- convenient = thuan loi

- a selection = a process of choosing carefully .
- available = san co de dung , co the de dung
- a mall = many stores , restaurants , even movies
theaters are under one roof .

- a resident = cu dan

* Checking vocabulary : What and where
2 . Brainstorming :

- Set the scene “ In Nam,_{s neighborhood , there is a}
new shopping mall .

- Ask Ss to think about the convenience of the
mall .

Play game
( whole class )

Listen and copy

Listen and repeat chorally ,
individually

Copy down .
Play games .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

 Possible answers :
- wide selection of goods
- lower prices

- buy many things at the same time
- have fun or relax while shopping
III / While - reading

- Ask Ss to read the text silently and compare their
or get more information .

- Give feedback

- Explain the meanings of some phrases rapidly
+ under one roof

+ shop in comfort
+ take their business
+ offer a wider selection
+ especially stores

+ have been concerned about
* True / False statements

- Have Ss look at the statements in the box and get
them to read the text again and decide which
statements are true , which are false .

Statements True False

1. A mall is open six days a week .
2. There are more than 50 stores in
the mall .

3. Everyone in the neighborhood is
pleased about the new mall .

4. It will be more comfortable to
shop in the mall than in the present
shopping area .

5. Some of the stores on Tran Phu
Street may have to close .

- Have Ss correct the false statements
1. The mall is open daily

2. There are 50 stores in the mall .

3. Not everyone is pleased . The owner of the small

stores on Tran Phu Street are not happy .

* Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in
the exercise 2/ 68

- Call on Ss to practice asking and answering the
questions

- Get all Ss to work in pairs
- Give feedback

IV / Post - reading :

- Give a situation and ask Ss to discuss it “ Do you
want to have a new mall in your neighborhood ? If

Read them aloud and copy .

Work individually

Work in pairs

Work in pairs

Work in group

Listen and copy .
<b>the convenience of </b>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

there is one , what will happen to the residents ? “
- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class .
V / Homework :

1. Copy their ideas about there is a mall in their
neighborhood .

2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Period 42 <i>Preparing date: 16 / 11 /2009</i>
Unit 7

My neighborhood
Lesson 4 : write

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a notice
B / Language content

* Grammar:

to be different from
the same as

in order to V
* Vocabulary

effect, to effect, to contact sbd, resident, store owner, hardware store.
C / Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards …

D/ Teaching method : Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Chatting
1. Have you ever written a notice ?
2. To whom ?

3. What for ?
4. What type ?

=> Lead in the new lesson .

II / Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the
writing and the scene “ The residents and store
owners on Tran Phu Street are going to hold a

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

meeting to discuss the effects of the new mall . “
*. Pre- teach vocabulary :

- effects (n) = tac dong , tac dung , hieu qua
- contact (v) = lien lac

- hardware store = dung cu dong dung trong nha
*. Guiding questions

a. Why are the residents and store owners on Tran
Phu street going to hold a meeting ?

b. When will they hold a meeting ? What time ?
c. Where will they hold the meeting ?

- Get Ss to read the notice and answer some
questions to check their understanding.

- Call on some pairs to practice asking answering
the questions .

a. To discuss the effects of the new mall

b. They will hold the meeting on May 20 at 8 p.m
c. They will hold the meeting at 12 Hang Dao
Street , Binh ,_{s hardware store .}

- Let Ss know how to write a notice , not write full
sentences .

- Ask Ss to read the passage and ask some

questions to check their understanding , get them
to use short answers .

1. What is the English Speaking club going to
hold ?

2. Where and when will it be held ?

3. What time ?

d. Who is the person contact ?

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions .

III / While -writing :

- Get Ss to write the notice individually
- Monitor and help them write

- Ask Ss to share with their partners
- Check some notices and correct them
- Write the model notice on the board
Suggested answers :

The school English Speaking club

Holding A Speaking Contest to celebrate teacher,_s
day

Date : November 15

Time : 7.30 pm to 10.oo pm
Place : Hall 204 , Building G

Please contact Ms .Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H
at the above address for more information .

V / Post - writing :

- Ask Ss to write one notice about their class
meeting

- Get them to work in group

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class .
- Give feedback

V / Homework :

1. Write the completed notice in their notebooks .
2. Do exercises in workbook .

Listen and copy .

Work in pairs

Read individually
Practice asking and
answering the questions .

Work in the whole class .

Work in pairs

Work individually
Work in pairs
Whole class

Read the correct notice

Work in group

Listen and copy .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<i> WEEK 15 </i> <i>Preparing date: 20 / 11 /2009</i>

Period 43 UNit 7

My neighborhood
Lesson 5 : Language focus

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present Perfect
<i>Tense and some adjectives to make comparisons . </i>

B Language content :
<i>Vocabulary : </i>

<i>Grammar : </i> + Present perfect tense
+ Comparision

C / Teaching aids : Textbook , 10 cards for pelmanism , poster ..
D/ Teaching method :

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Matching

- Stick a poster of infinitives and Past Participles on
the board.

- Divide the class into 2 teams

- Get Ss form 2 teams to go to the board and write
each pair of infinitive – past participle

be see collected go
worked

lived do seen eat
attended

write been written eaten
work

attend done live collect
gone

Answers :

 be – been write – written
 go – gone live – lived

 see – seen collect – collected
 do – done attend – attended

 eat – eaten work – worked
- Get Ss to repeat in chorus and remember the past
participles of irregular verbs .

II / Revision and practice :
1) Revision

- Set the scene “ Na is new in Nam ,_s

neighborhood . They are talking to each other .”
- Give Ss an open dialogue between Nam and Na ,
then ask them to complete it

Na : How long ….. you … in this neighborhood ?
Nam : I ... here …..10 years .

Na : Really . It is a long time .

Play game
( whole class )

Repeat chorally ,

individually , then copy
Listen and copy

Work in pairs

Practice in front of class .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

* Answers : have – lived / have – lived – for
- Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue and ask them to
practice in pairs .

=> Form : have / has + past participle

Use : to talk about something which started in
the past and continues up to the present

We often uses “ For “ and “ Since “ with the
Present Perfect Tense

For + length of time
Since + starting point
2) Practice :

Ex 2 :

- Ask Ss to look at exercise 2 / 69 and decide which
is the length of time and which is starting point .
- Read out a phrase , and Ss to add Since or For
- Go on until Ss can remember how to use
For/Since

Ex 3 : - Give the cues written on cards and ask Ss
to make full sentences .

- Correct their pronunciation

Example : I / live / here / last week
 I have lived here since last week
Ex 4: Ask Ss to complete the conversations
- Have them work in pairs

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback

1. have been 2. hope
3. have lived 4. is
5. want 6. looks
7. have been 8. have seen
- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs .
Ex 5

* Game : Pelmanism
<i>differen</i>

<i>t</i> <i>cheap</i> <i>expensive</i> <i>long</i> <i>same</i>

<i>modern</i> <i>short</i> <i>big</i> <i>small</i>

- Show Ss 3 books , a red book and a yellow one
which have the same size and a bigger brown
dictionary then ask Ss to make comparisons
Example :

- The red book is the same as the yellow one
- The red book is as big as the yellow one

- The yellow book is different from the brown
dictionary .

- The yellow is not as big as the brown dictionary .
=> Form : The same as …

( not ) as … as
different from

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise 5 / 70
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback

a. not as big as
b. different from

c. different from d. the same as
e. not as big as f. the same as

g. as long as h. not as modern as i. not as cheap
as

Work on the whole class

Work individually

Work in pairs

Work in groups

Listen and repeat chorally ,
individually

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

III/ Further practice

Do exercise: supply the correct form of the verbs.
1. How long you (live) here?

I(live) here for 10 years. My family (move) to
Hanoi in 1994.

2.What you (do) now ? I (watch) a football match
on TV. I (watch) it since 7 a.m.

3.We (not see) each other since we left school.
4. I (be) a student for 8 years.

5. Peter just ( come) back home.
IV/ Consolidation

- Remind the present perfect tense with "since" /
"for" . Comparison with like, (not)as… as, (not) the
same as, different from.

V/ Homework :

1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks .
2. Do exercises 5,6,7 (Page 46,47- Workbook).

3. Prepare the next lesson .

1.have you lived
have lived- moved
2.are you doing
am watching
3. haven't seen
4. have been
5. has just come

<i> Period 44 Preparing date: 20 / 11 /2009</i>
Unit 8

Country life and city life
lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about the city
<i>life and the country life </i>

B/ Language content :

<i>Vocabulary : Relative , hear , peaceful , permanently , remote , medical , accessible ,</i>
friendly

<i>Grammar : </i>

C/ Teaching aids : Pictures in textbook and cassette player
D/ Method teaching :

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Chatting

- Talk to Ss about life in the city and life in the
country by asking some questions

1. Where do you live ?

2. Do you want to live in the city ? Why ?
3. Do you want to live in the country ? Why ?
Lead in the new lesson

II / Presentation : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words .

- a relative = uncles , aunts cousins
- peaceful = quiet and calm (a)

- permanently (adv) : its means existing all the time

Chatting

( whole class )

Listen and copy

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

- accessible = co the den gan duoc

- medical facilities = cac phuong tien y te

* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember
* Brainstorming ( Getting started )

- Get Ss to talk about city life and country life . The
words in the box of getting started may help you .

 Possible answers :

- tall buildings - beautiful views
- plenty kinds of goods - fresh food
- polluted air - fresh air
- traffic jams - friendly
- entertainment - peaceful
- busy

III / Practice :

1. True / false statements

Statements True False

1. Na lives in the city

2. Na went to a village which has
some relatives lives there .

3. The village is very peaceful and
quiet

4. Hoa prefers the city life

x
x
x

x
- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to work in groups to
predict the true / false statements .

- Call on some Ss to report their predictions and write
them on the board.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Na and Hoa and
compare their ideas

- Give feedback and get more information
- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue
2. Comprehension questions :

- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in ex
2 / 73

- Call on some pairs to practice asking answering the
questions in front of class .

- Give feedback

a. Na has been to Kin Lien village
b. She was there for the weekend

c. to her , the countryside is peaceful and quiet and
there is nothing to do .

d. There is no libraries , no movies , no supermarket ,
no zoos …

e. Country life is becoming better . Many remote area
are getting electricity . People can now have things
like refrigerators and TV , medical facilities are more
accessible .

- Ask Ss to work in closed pairs

Copy down
Play game

Work in groups

Work in groups to predict

Read the dialogue ,
compare their ideas
Practice the dialogue in
pairs

Work in pairs

Practice asking and
answering the questions

city life country

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

IV / Consolidation :
Discussion

- Divide the class into 4 groups . Two groups include
Ss who prefer the city life and the others include Ss
who prefer the country life .

- Ask Ss to work in groups to answer the questions
“ Do you prefer the city or the country life ?Why ? “
- Call on 4 pioneers from 4 groups to show their ideas
before class .

V / Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words and copy two lines for
each word

2. Copy the answers in their notebooks .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Work in groups

Demonstrate their ideas in
front of class .

Listen and copy

period 45 Preparing date: 20 / 11 /2009
Unit 8

Country life and city life
lesson 2 : Speak + LISTEN

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice speaking
<i>about the changes of a place </i>

B/ Language content

-Present progress with "get" and "become"

-Comparative with short adjectives and long adjectives.
C / Teaching aids : textbooks , pictures , poster

D/ Teaching method :

Communitive approach
C / Procedure :

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

- Prepare eight cards with phrases on them

- Write eight verbs on the board ( play , do , watch ,
go , clean , have , phone , speak )

- Divide the class into 2 teams
- Hand out each team 8 cards

- Ask Ss to stick the cards with phrases besides the
suitable verbs

- The team which is faster is the winner
* Answers :

- play table tennis
- do my homework
- watch a program

- go to a violin lesson
- clean the house

- have a meeting

- phone my aunt , Mrs Hang
- speak to Mom

=> Lead in the new lesson
II/ Speak

1/Pre-speaking

Word square
- Ask Ss to find out 7 adjectives

E X P E N S I B

O A M D N U V E

U B O I S V E A

I C D R T R U

Y L E T L L A T

S M R Y H G I

U O N O I S Y F

B P T F D E L U

- Ask Ss to work in 2 teams

- Ask Ss to go to the board and circle the word they
find

- The team which circles more words will win the
game .

Modern – dirty – busy – noisy – tall –
expensive – beautiful

 Setting the scene “ Hoa,_{s grand father is 78 “}
- Five years ago , she was 73 and she was stronger
than she is now .

- Ask Ss to make a sentence about her health
=> Hoa,_{s grand father is getting weaker}
+ Form : am / is / are + V-ing

+ Use : used to describe changes with get and
become

2 / While – speaking :

- Ask Ss to look at the two pictures on page 73 and
talk to their partners about the changes of the town .
The words in the box under the pictures may help
you

- Write the word prompts on the board so that Ss can
speak easily

- traffic - > busy

Work in group

Work in the whole class .

Listen and copy

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

- sky -> cloudy
- houses -> high
- city -> beautiful
- trees - > green
- Get Ss to work in pairs
- Monitor and help Ss speak
* Possible answers :

- The traffic is getting busier .

- There are more tall buildings and houses .
- The houses are getting more modern
- The town is becoming more beautiful .

- The streets are becoming cleaner / larger / noisier
3 / Post - speaking :

- Ask Ss to work in groups and talk about changes in
their hometown / neighborhood .

- Call on volunteer from each group to show their
ideas before the class . Other groups can add in their
ideas .

III/ Listen
1/ Pre-listening

Set the scene “ Aunt Hang is talking to Lan on the
phone . She is coming to visit Lan in Hanoi “

- Ask Ss to predict information in the dialogue .
- Call on some Ss to report their predictions
2/While-listening

Turn on the tape and check their predictions
- Let them listen twice and find out the missing
words individually .

- Ask Ss to share their answers with their partners
- Call some Ss to read their results

Give feedback

1. that 2. this 3. It is

4. where 5. from 6. coming
7. next week 8. arriving 9. Thursday
10 . late 11. afternoon 12 . speak
13. my 14 . get her

3/Post-listening

- Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and Aunt Hang to
practice the dialogue

IV / Homework :

-Write some sentences , using Present Progressive
Tense to describe changes in their school

- Copy down the completed dialogue in their
notebooks .

- Do exercises in work book
- Prepare the next lesson

Work in group
Work individually

Listen and copy .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

<i> week 16 </i> <i>Preparing date: 28 / 11 /2009</i>
Period 46 UNIT 8

Country life and city life
lesson 3 : Read

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the text
<i>about one of the social problems . </i>

B / Language content

Well-payingjobs, typhoon,flood, overcrowding, strain,tragedy, live apart, drought, great
pressure, struggle, water and electricity supplies.

C / Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette .
D/ Teaching method :

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up :

Jumbled words

- Write the words with disordered letters on the
board .

+ Fulentipl -> plentiful
+ taneru -> nature
+ loofd -> flood
+ roestdy -> destroy
+ viroped -> provide
+ suertl -> result
+ ciliestial -> facilities

- Ask them to write the correct words on the board
and repeat chorally , individually

=> Lead in the new lesson .
II / Pre- reading :

- Introduce the topic of the passage reading and
some new words to Ss .

1. Pre - teach vocabulary :

- rural (adj ) : something deals with the countryside

- urban ( adj ) >< rural

- strain (n) = sù qóa tải ( dân số )
- typhoon (n) = storm (n)

- drought (n) : hot and dry weather for a long time
- to struggle = đấu tranh

- migrant (n) : a person who moves from one place to
another especially in order to find work .

- to increase = tăng lên , tăng thêm

* Checking vocabulary : What and where
2. Brainstorming :

- Ask Ss to think of the difficulties of farmers,_life
Possible answers :

droughts / the weather / hard work / no vacations /
lack of clean water / electricity / insects destroy
harvests ..

Work in group

Listen and copy down

Listen and repeat

chorally , individually ,

then copy down .

Play game

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

- Ask Ss to work in groups to guess how farmers deal
with difficulties

- Call on some Ss to report their predictions and
write them on the board

III / While - reading :

- Let Ss listen to the tape and read the text silently to
check their predictions .

- Answer “ What do many farmers do to solve their
problem ? “

=> They have to move to the city so that they can get
well – paid jobs .

- Call on some Ss to read the text in front of class .
1. Gap- filling :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs o complete summary ,
using the information from the passage .

- Call on some volunteers to report their results

- Give feedback

<i>1. leaving 2. home 3. city 4. rural </i>

<i>5. city 6. problems 7. schools 8. hospitals </i>
<i> 9. problem 10 . world </i>

- Call on some Ss to read the complete passage aloud
2. Finding the words

- Ask Ss to read the text again and work with their
partners

- Call them to report their results
- Give feedback

<i>a. rural b. plentiful c. increase </i>
d. strain e. tragedy f. urban

IV / Post - reading : Discussion

- Give a situation : If you were a Minister , what
would you do for farmers ?

- Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss
* Suggested answers :

- build streets , theaters , stadiums in the countryside
- build schools , hospitals

- provide clean water , electricity , facilities
- build factory .

- Call on 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their
ideas before the class .

V / Homework :

1. Write 5 things that government should do for the
rural areas .

2. Do exercises in workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Demonstrate in front of
class

Work in groups to guess
the difficulties of

farmers .

Listen to the tape and
read the text to check
their predictions
Answer the question
Read the text aloud .
Work in pairs

Read their results .

Read the complete
summary .

Read the text again and
do the exercise 2 / 75
Read the complete
results .

Work in groups to
discuss

Show their ideas before
class .

Listen and copy .
difficulties of

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

<i> Preparing date: 28 / 11 /2009</i>
Period 47 Unit 8

Country life and city life
Lesson 4 : write

A/ Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write letters to their
<i>friends about their neighborhood .</i>

B/ Language content

The parts of the letter: Date, Heading, Opening, Body of the letter. Closing.
C / Teaching aids : Textbook , cards , chalks……….

D/ Teaching method :

Communitive approach
E/ Procedure :

I / Warm up : Revision

- Ask Ss to put the outline for an informal letter in
the correct order .

- Prepare 6 cards with 6 outlines on them .

- Call 6 Ss to hold them and stand in a random order
- Ask some other Ss to rearrange them in the correct
order .

- Write the answer on the board and ask Ss to copy .
1. Heading

- Writer,_{s address}
- Date

- Dear ………... ,
2. opening

3. Body

4. closing

II / Pre- writing :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .

Work on the whole class
.

Listen and copy down

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions

- Give feedback

III / While … writing :

- Ask Ss to write letters to friends about their
neighborhood

- Let them write individually .

- Have them compare with their partners and correct
if they can .

* Suggested letter :
( Writer,_{s address)}

( Date )

Dear ....,

I live in ….. , a small town . My family has a large
house with four rooms and a small garden . My
sister and I share one bedroom . From the bedroom
window , I can see a beautiful park with green tress ,
flowers and a pond . we do not live far form my
school so I usually walk there .

In my neighborhood , there is a swimming pool and
a beautiful park . On the weekend , I often go

swimming with my friends . Early in the morning , I
always jog with my sister around the park . But the
thing I like best in my neighborhood is the public
library near my school . There I not only can study
and read books but also watch video and learn how
to use the computer .

Do you have a library like that in your neighborhood
? Is there anything interesting in the place where
you live ? Write to me

I would like to say goodbye now . I am looking
forwards to hearing from you soon .

Love ,

( Signature )

IV / Post - writing : Correction

- Choose some letters to correct before class and ask
them to read them aloud .

V / Homework :

1. Write their letters on their notebooks
2. Prepare the next lesson .

asking and answering the
questions

Work individually
Compare with their
partners

Exchange their writings
to correct .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

<i> Preparing date: 28 / 11 /2009</i>
<i> Period 48 </i>

Unit 8

Country life and city life

lesson 5 : Language focus

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present
<i>progressive and comparative and superlative adjectives .</i>

B / Language content
Comparative

Superlative

C / Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , boards …
D/ Teaching method :

Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Matching

A B Key

1. play
2. do
3. watch
4. go
5. clean
6. have
7. phone
8. speak

a. to Mom

b. table tennis
c. a program
d. a meeting

e. my aunt , Mrs Hang
f. the house

g. my homework
h. to violin lesson

1.b
2.g
3.c
4.h
5.f
6.d
7.e
8.a
- Call 2 volunteers from 2 teams to do the matching
II / Revision and Practice

1.Revision

-Remind students of the forms of comparative and
superlative adj.

a) Comparative

Short Adj + ER + than + Object
More + Long Adj +than + object

b) Superlative

The short adj + est

The most+ long Adjective
c) Irregular adjectives

Good/ well - better - the best
bad - worse - the worst
many - more - the most
little - less - the least
2. Practice

Ex 2 : Ask Ss to use the suitable verbs in the
Present Progressive Tense to complete the exercise
- Get Ss to work in pairs

- Call on some pairs to practice the dialogues before
class and correct

=> What tense do we use in 6 dialogues ?
What is the form ?

Look at the adverbs of time in the dialogue . Are
they at present or in the future ?

Present Progressive Tense is used to talk about the
future .

Ex 1 : Ask Ss to practice the dialogue as example

S1 : Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11. 30 ?

Work in group
( 2 teams )

-Work in the class

Work in pairs

Answer the questions

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

S2 : Is that good fortune ?
S1 : That is right

S2 : I am very sorry . It has been delayed .
S1 : Oh , no !

S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 . 45

- Give them the shipping information and ask them
to make similar dialogues

Ex 3 : Present Progressive Tense is used to describe
changes with “ get “ and “ become “

* Drill : Prepare six cards of cues
a. The boys / get / tall

b. The old men / become / weak
c. It / become / dark

d. The weather / get / cold
e. The students / get / better

f. The school yard / become / cleaner

- Model first two cues , then whole class repeat
chorally , then some Ss read out individually
- Give a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in
class can remember the structure .

Ex 4 : Have Ss work in pairs to make comparisons
between the city and the country .

Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the city
- Let each Student read aloud one of the sentences
they have made .

- Give feedback
IV / Further practice :

- Ask Ss to read the advertisements then ask them
some questions to check their understanding
+ what are advertised ?

( an apartment , a villa and a house )
+ How old are they ?

( The apartment is 2 years old , the villa is 5 years
old and the house is new )

+ How much do we pay per month ?

( 900,000 dongs for the apartment , 6,6 million
dongs for the house and 7,8 million dongs for the
villa )

- Game “ Nought and Crosses “ , using comparative
and superlative adjectives

old expensive big

expensive small hot

big beautiful old

Eg : - The villa is older than the apartment

- The house is more expensive than the apartment
V / Homework :

1/Redo all the exercises and copy down
2/ Prepare the next lesson .

Work individually

Repeat chorally ,
individually

Repeat the form of
comparative and
superlative adjectives

Listen and copy

Work in pairs

Listen and answer the
questions

Play game
( whole class )

Listen and copy

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

WEEK 17 <i>Preparing date: 05 / 12/ 2009</i>

Period 49 REVISION

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to grasp the

<i>knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement what they </i>
<i>are short of . </i>

B/ Language content

- Present simple to talk about the general truth.
- (not) adj + enough + to V

- be going to + V
- Adverbs of place

- Modals: must , have to, ought to,
- Used to + V

C / Teaching aids : Textbook , chalks , boards
D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, in groups
E / Procedure :

Teacher's activities Students' activities
I/ Warm up

- T devides the class into 2 groups and asks
representative of each group to do exercise.
Write full sentences

1. The sun/ rise/ East/ set / West.
2. He/ old/ enough/ go/ school
3. This / test/ easy/ enough/ us/ do.
4. They/ going / buy/ a/ new /house.
II/ Consolidation and practice

1) Consolidation

* T asks students to repeat form of present

simple.

* T asks students to repeat the use of
structure " enough " and " be going to".
S + be (not) + adj + enough + to V.
* Prepositions of time

- Group work

1. The sun rises in the East…

2. He is old enough to go to school.
3.This test is easy enough for us to
do.

4.They are going to buy a new house
* Present simple to talk about

general truths.

- To talk about intentions with " be
going to"

S + be going to + V + O

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

Repeat somes prepositions of time: in, on,
at, after, before, between.

2) Practice

Practice 1: Supply the correct verb form.
* T asks Ss to practice in groups.

1. I usually ( have) bread for breakfast.
2. They are going to ( see) a movie on
Sunday.

3. Yesterday he (receive) a letter.
4. The moon ( move) around the earth.
Practice 2: Combine each pair of sentences
into one sentence, using (not) adj + enough.
1. The tea isn't strong. It won't keep us
awake.

2 The ice is quite thick. We can walk on it.
3. The little boy is not strong. He can't lift
the suitcase.

III/ Further practice

-Hang sub boards and asks Ss to do
exercise

Exercise 1:Find and correct mistakes
1. It is hot in winter.

2. The sun rises in the West.

3. We are going have a meeting on Friday.
4. The weather wasn't very warm enough
for us go swimming.

Exercise 2: Fill in the each blank with a
suitable preposition.

1. I got up …………7 o'clock.
2. The children get too many
presents……….Christmas.

3. She was born in Canada……….. 1952.
4. We couldn't sleep ……….night.

5. We moved here……….20th May
6. We'll have a party……….. Sunday.
7. They came here………… the afternoon.
IV/ Remember

T repeats some structures
- Simple tense

- enough + to V
- Prepositions
V/ Homework
Revise grammar.

In the morning/ in time
on Sunday, on March 1st
at noon, at night

before midday

* Representative do exercise
1. have

2. are going to see
3. received

4. moves

1.The tea isn't strong enough to keep
us awake.

2. The ice is thick enough for us to
walk on.

3. The little boy is not strong enough
to lift the suitcase.

- Correct the mistakes
1. it is hot in Summer.
2. The sun rises in the East.

3. We are going to have a meting on
Friday.

4. The weather wasn't warm enough
for us to go swimming.

1.at
2.at
3.in
4.at
5.on
6.on
7.in

<i> Preparing date: 05 / 12/ 2009</i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

A / Aims and Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise:
+ Adverbs of manner

+ Commands, requests and advice in reported speech
+ Gerund

B/ Language content
S + ask + Sbd + to V
tell

C/ Teaching aids: sub-board

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

Teacher's activities Students' activities

I/ Warm up

T gives some questions and asks Students to
answer

+ How many subjects do you have at school?
What are they?

+ Do you like English?

+ What should you do to improve your
English?

II/ Consolidation and practice
1. Grammar

- T asks Ss to give the form of adverbs of
manner.

Slow Slowly
Bad Badly
Quick Quickly
* Note

Hard Hard
Fast fast
Late Late
Early Early
Good Well

- Commands, requests in reported speech
+ S + ask/ tell + O + to V

+ S + ask/ tell + O + not + to V
- Advice in reported speech
+ S + advise + O + toV
not to V

+ S1 + said (that) + S2 + should + V
2. Practice

Practice 1: Complete the following sentences
with the appropriate word

1. We lost the match because we didn't
play…………( good).

2. He is a good driver. He drives very
..

………… (careful).

3. She is a famous singer. She sings

…………(beauty).

4. Don't walk so quickly. Can you walk more

…………(slow).

5. It's a very simple questions. You can

……….. answer it (easy).
Practice 2

Write the following sentences into reported
speech.

1. " Could you buy me an English book, Ha?"
Nam asked.

2." Please turn off the radio, Ba", Mr Quang
said.

3." Get up early to learn your lesson, Toan".
His father said.

4. " Don't go near the lake, children", Mrs
Nga said.

5." Can you get back home by half past ten,
Lan?". Her father said.

III/ Further pratice

T hangs sub-board and asks ss to do in groups
Find and correct sentence

1. Peter's teacher asked his mother pay more
attention to his study at home.

2. He's a good driver. His drives his car
careful.

- Answer the questions

- Give the form of adverbs of
manner.

Adj + ly Adv

- Group work
1. well

2. carefully
3. beautifully
4. slowly
5. easily
- Group work

1. Nam asked Ha to buy him an
English book.

2. Mr quang told ba to turn off
the radio.

3. Nam's father asked him to get
up early to learn his lesson.
4. Mrs Nga asked her children
not to go near the lake.

5. Lan' father asked Lan to get
back homeby half past ten.
- Group work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<i> Preparing date: 05 / 12/ 2009</i>

Period 51 REVISION
A / Aims and Objectives

Revise Present perfect with "since" and" for"

Comparison with like/ not as………as/ (not) the same as/ different from.
Comparative and supelative adjectives

B/ Language content
S + have/ has + PII + O

S + be (not) as/ so + adj + as………….
S + be + short adj +ER + than……….
More + long adj

S + be + the + short adj + Est +…….
the Most + Long adj

C/ Teaching aids: sub- board

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

Teacher's activities Students' activities
I/ Warm up

Arrange these adjectives into two
groups(short adj/ long adj).

Clean/ happy/ comfortable/ beautiful/ cheap/
expensive/ noisy/ fast/ tall/ short/ pretty/
busy/ difficult/ intelligent/ fat/ clever/ narrow/
quiet/ difficult.

- Comment and give marks
II/ Consolidation and practice
1. Consolidation: Grammar

T ask students to give the form of the present
perfect tense with " since, for".

- The structures of comparative and
superlative adjectives.

2. Practice

Practice 1: supply the correct verb form in
the past simple or present perfect.

a) It ( start) raining an hour ago.
b) I ( know) Lan for some months.

c) We ( not see) Nga since Monday.
d) They (move ) to Hanoi in 2003.
e) Peter (be) ill for a week.

Practice 2: Complete the sentences with the
correct form of the adj.

a) This bag is ( expensive) as that bag.
b) Our school is (large) than your school.
c) She is ( beautiful) girl in her class.
d)Hoa's dress is ( long ) than Mai's dress.
e) Nam is the (tall) boy in his class.
III/ Further practice

T hangs sub-board. Ask Ss to do exercise:
Put "for/ since" into each gap

a) He's been in China……….. January.
b) They haven't seen each other……
last week..

c) We haven't phoned each other………
along time.

d) I've read this novel……… 2 hours
e) We have known him……… some years.
IV/ Remember

- Teacher repeats the form of present perfect
tense.

- Teacher repeats the structures of
comparative and superlative adj.

-Group work: 2 groups

- Representative of each group
shows in front of the class.
Short adj Long adj
Clean Beautiful
Cheap Comfortable
Tall Expensive
Short Intelligent
Clever Difficult
Quite

Narrow

(+) S + have/ has + PII + O
(-) S + have/ has + not + PII + O
(?) Have/ Has + S + PII +O?
- S + be (not) as + adj + as……
Nam is as tall as Ba.

- S + be (not) the same as that bag
- S + be + short adj + er + than….
More + long adj

Hoa is more beautiful than Lan
- S + be + the short adj +est+….

the Most + long adj….
He is the most intelligent boy in
his class.

- Do exercises
a) stared

b) have known
c) have not seen
d) moved

e) Has Peter been
a) as expensive as
b) larger

c) the most beautiful
d) longer

e) the tallest
- Group work
a) since
b) since
c) for
d) for
e) for

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

Ngµy 14 / 12 / 2009

<i> </i>

<i> Preparing date: 15 / 12/ 2009</i>
week 18

Period 52 REVISION
A / Aims and Objectives

- Revise writing skill
+ Writing the letter
+ Writing a message
+ Writing a notice
B/ Language content
- Revise vocabulary
- The order of the letter.
C/ Teaching aids: sub- board

D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E/ Procedure

Teacher's activities Students' activities

I/ Warm up

Arrange the order of the letter

Opening Heading

Date Writer's address
Closing Body of the letter

II/ Consolidation and Practice
1. Consolidation: Grammar
Teacher has students repeat
-The order of the letter
- Notice

- Message

2. Practice

Practice 1: Make complete sentences from
the words below:

a) He/ be/ not/ sociable/ as/ his brother.
b) We/ enjoy/ tell/ jokes.

c) I/ used/ collect/ stamps/ when/ be/
child.

d) He/ work/ that company/ 6 years.

- Arrange the order of the letter
1. Heading

- Writer's address
- Date

2. Opening

3. Body of the letter
4. Closing

a) Thanh Cong delivery service
Date

Time
For
Message
Taken by
b) Heading
Opening

Body of the letter
Closing

c) Notice

Date Time
Place

Please contact
- Do exercise

a) He is not as sociable as his brother.
b) We enjoy telling jokes.

c) I used to cellectstamps when I was

a child.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

e) What/ you/use/ do/ last year?

Practice 2: Write a letter to Nhan, using the
words given.

Dear Nhan,

- It/ be/month/ since/ I/ write/ you

- And we/ not meet/ or see/ each other/ three
months

- Now/ here/ be/ suggestion/ I/ be/ happy/
make

- You/ come/ here/ me/ this weekend?
- Please/ write/ back/ me/ soon/ possible.
Your friend,

Lan

III/ Further practice

- T hangs sub-board and asks to do exercise
Use these suggested words to write a

complete passage

This is our living room

1) There/ some beautifulpictures/ wall.
2) Middle/ room/ table/ 4 chairs.

3) Lighting fixture/ above/ table

4) TV/ to the right/ window/ near/table.

IV/ Remember

Teacher repeat the outline of the message
and the letter.

V/ Homework

Revise Unit 1 Unit 8

for 6 years.

e) What did you use to do last year?
Dear Nhan,

It is a month since I write to you.
We haven't met or seen each other for
three months.

Now here is a suggestion that I'm

happy to make

Will you come here with me this…
Please write back to me as soon as
possible.

Your friend
Lan

- There are some beautiful pictures on
the wall

- In the middle of the room there is a
table and four chairs

- The lighting fixture is above the
table.

- The TV is to the right of the window
and near the table.

-Listen and remember.

Preparing date: 15 / 12/ 2009

Period 53 The first semester test

A / Aims and Objectives : Students will be able to summarize the basic knowledge they
<i>have learnt to do the test well </i>

B / Teaching aids : Test paper , chalk , board …..
C / Test

- Deliver the test paper to students .

I / Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets 2,0 Ps
1 . We must be there( at /before/ between /after )7. 30 and 8 . 15

2. Vietnamese language is different ( as/like / from /with ) English language .
3. She told me ( giving / to give /gave ) you this present .

4. Jane is( as/ like /the most / more ) beautiful than her sister .)
5 . Mary likes( playing/ plays /played /play )the piano .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

8. I have known her ( since / for / at / in ) three years .
<i>II / Complete the conversation : ( 2,0 Ps )</i>

A : Can I help you ?

B : I would like ……… this parcel to Hanoi

A : Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ?
B : I am not sure . ……….. is airmail ?

A : I will have ……….. the parcel first . Well , two kilograms . That will be 9,000 dong
B : That is not very cheap . But ………..it airmail .

A : All right .

III / Supply the correct tense form of the verbs in the brackets : ( 2,0 Ps )
1. They ( live ) …………... in Hanoi for 20 years .

2. My aunt ( not go ) ……….. out of her house since she ( buy )………. a color TV
3. The film ( begin ) ………..at 7. 30 pm tonight .

IV/ Read the passage carefully . Then answer the questions below : ( 2,0 Ps )

Chiang Mai is a city in Thailand that has a wonderful night market . In the evening , the
main street is lined with small stands and shops that sell almost anything you can imagine
. Some stands sell jewelry or clothing , others sell traditional Thai crafts and still others
sell fresh fruit and species . It is easy to spend an entire evening just looking at everything
. If you decide to buy something , you will not be disappointed The prices are very

reasonable . There are a lot of wonderful attractions in Chiang Mai , but the night market
is a favorite for many people .

1. Where is Chiang Mai ?

2. What is Chiang Mai famous for ?

3. What can you buy in some stands in Chiang Mai ?
4. Are the prices expensive ?

V / Listening comprehension : You are going to listen twice . Check (v) the correct box
for True or False : ( 2,0 Ps )

Statements True False

1. Ba is younger than Lan

2. Lan is shorter than her brother

3. Both Ba and Lan go to school in the morning
4. They love pop music , reading novels .

5. They do not lke playing chess and going swimming
in summer .

6. Ba likes watching war films on TV
<i> </i>
<i> The end</i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

The second semester

WEEK 21 <i> Preparing date:05/ 01/ 2010</i>
Period 54 A Unit 9

first aids course
Lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know what they
<i>would do in the situations which require first - aid</i>

B/ Language content

nose bleed, bee sting, emergency, ambulance, conscious, cut one’s head.
C/ Teaching aids :

<i>Text book , cassette , pictures , gap fill chart , drawing ..</i>
D/ Procedure :

Activities Work arrangement

I / Warm up : Kim,_{s game ( Getting started )}
- Ask Ss to open their books and look at the things
on page 80 for 20 seconds . Tell them these things
are often used for first - aid

- Divide the class into two groups .

- Ask Ss to close their books and go t6o the board to
write the names of the things they have just seen
from memory .

- Tell them the group having the most right English
words is the winner

- Have them open the books again and go through
the words in English .

<i>Suggested answers :</i>

1. emergency room 2. sterile dressing

3. medicated oil 4. ice 5. water pack 6. alcohol
- Have them discuss and write down what they
would do in these situations which require first –
aid

- Call on some groups to give their answers and
correct

<i>Possible answers : </i>

+ A girl has a burn on her arm -> Use cold water /
ice to ease the pain

+ A boy has a bad cut on his leg -> Use alcohol /
medicated oil / sterile dressing

+ A girl has a nose bleed -> Use a handkerchief to
stop the bleeding / tell her to lie down .

+ A boy has a bee sting -> Use medicated oil …
II/ Presentation :

Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some

Whole class

Team work

Whole class

Group work of 4/5 Ss

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

new words .

- (an) ambulance -> drawing

- (an) emergence = cap cuu , tinh trang khan cap
- unconscious (adj) >< conscious (adj)

- to bleed -> the bleeding

-> Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary in their notebooks
* Checking technique: Slap the board

<i>( Put the new words in Vietnamese on the board )</i>
- Hang the chart with the paragraph on the board .
<i> There was an emergency at Lan,_{s school . A student}</i>
<i>…..(1)…. off her bike and hit her head on the road .</i>
<i>She was …..(2)…. but she cut her head and the </i>
<i>…….(3)…. was ……(4)….. badly . Lan telephoned </i>
<i>Bach Mai Hospital and asked the nurse to send an </i>
<i>……(5)….. to Quang Trung School . Lan was asked </i>
<i>to keep the student …..(6)…. while waiting for the </i>
<i>ambulance . </i>

- Ask Ss to predict the words in the gaps

- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write their

words

III / Practice

- Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue , then check their predictions
- Give feedback 1. fell 2. conscious 3. cut
4. bleeding 5. ambulance 6. awake
* Comprehension questions

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and select the
topic covered in the dialogue .

- Have Ss work in groups to write their answers on a
sheet of paper and hand in after finishing .

- Collect Ss ,_{papers and give feedback : a- b- c- e- f}
IV / Further practice :

- Have Ss in turn play the roles to demonstrate the
dialogue .

- Ask Ss to write a story using the information from
the dialogue .

- Tell Ss to begin their story with :

“ Yesterday there was an emergency at ……. “
- Monitor and help Ss with their work

V / Homework :

1. Let Ss do the exercises in the workbook (1,2 / 55 )
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Whole class
Team work

Individual work
T – Ss

Groupwork of 4/5 Ss
T – Ss

Pair work

Individual work

<i> Preparing date: 05/ 01/ 2010</i>
Period 55

Unit 9
A first aids course
lesson 2 : Speak + Listen
A/ Aims and Objectives :

<i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make and respond to requests , offers , and </i>
<i>promises . </i>

Students listen to a paragraph for details about the activities taking place in an emergecy

room.

B/ Language content

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

2) Vocabulary : I’m afraid not, to forget, to promise

crutch,wheelchair, eye chart, stretcher, paramedic
C / Teaching aids : pictures , charts and posters ..

D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Net work

 Possible answers :
- have a snake bite

- have a burn
- have a cut
- have a bee sting
- have a nose bleed ...
II/ Speak

1/ Pre - speaking : Introduce the topic of the
speaking and some models sentences .

* Set the scene :

- Ask Ss some questions to elicit the models

+ I want you to get me a bandage . How can I say ?
+ I would like you to come to my party . How can I
say ?

+ I tell my mother that I will surely finish my work
before bedtime . How can I say ?

- Have Ss repeat 2 or 3 times before writing them on
the board ( underline the key words )

+ Will you ( please ) get me a bandage ?
+ Would you like to come to my party ?
+ I promise I will finish my homework before
bedtime .

=> Concept checking

- Get Ss to work out the rules for themselves by
asking questions .

- After formulating the model sentences , elicit some
more phrases with the same use from students .
a) To make a request :

Will

Would you ( please ) + V ……. ?
Could

Can

<i>Reponses : </i>

+ Sure / Ok / All right .

- I am sorry . I can / I am afraid not
b) To make an offer

Will / Won,_{t you}

Shall I + V ………..?
Can I

Would you like + to V ………...?

Group work of 8 – 10
students

T- Ss

T – Ss

T – Ss
<i><b>Situations which </b></i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

What can I do / get for you ?

Can I get you ………..?
<i>Responses : </i>

+ Yes , please . / That would be nice .
- No , thank you .

1.3 To make a promise

I promise I will / I will not ………..
I will ………... I promise .

I promise to …………...
<i>Reponses : </i>

I hope . / Good . / I am glad . / Do not forget
- Ask Ss to copy down .

2 / While - speaking :
* Matching :

- Hang the chart with the statements on the board .
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures ( page 82 ) and match
the situations with the statements .

1. The girl has a burn on her hand .
2. The girl has a bad fever .

3. The boy has just broken the vase .
4. The boy has a headache .

5. The boy has a snake bite .

- Give feedback : 1.a 2. d 3. e 4. b 5. c
**. Picture Drill :

- Identify the situations in the pictures
Picture a) -> request

“ b) -> offer / request
“ c) -> offer / request
“ d) -> offer

“ e) -> promise
- Ask Ss to work in pairs

+ Model : Could you give me a bandage , please ?
Sure . Here you are

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges in
front of class .

3 / Post - speaking :

Pair work ( closed pairs )

- Get Ss in turn to practice all the exchanges
- Monitor and correct , encourage Ss to make
sentences for themselves

- Collect their ideas and write them on the boards

* Suggested answers :

b. A : Can I get you some water / medicine ?
B : Yes, please .

c. A : Can I get you some bandage ?
B : That would be nice

d. A : You must have a fever . Can I get you some
medicine / water ?

B : NO , I am fine . Thank you .

e. A : I promise I will not play soccer in the house
again .

B : I hope so .
III/Listen

1 / Pre- listening : Introduce the topic of the listening
and some new words

a). Pre teach vocabulary :
- an eye chart ( using picture )

Whole class

Group work of 4 / 5 Ss

T – Ss

Pair work

Pair work

Listen and copy

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

-> eye sight

- a parademic : he takes care of patients but he is not
a doctor nor a nurse

- a wheelchair ( using the picture )
-> to wheel ( to push a wheel chair )
- a stretcher ( picture )

- a crutch -> crutches ( picture )
-> Have Ss copy

* Checking technique : What and where
b). Matching :

- Ask Ss to look at the picture in their books again
and match the letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct
words in the box .

- Call on some volunteers from each group to
demonstrate in front of class .

- Give feedback

A -> ambulance D -> eye chart
B -> wheelchair E -> scale
C -> crutches F -> stretcher
2 / While – listening :

a). Order Prediction

- Rub out the letter ( A ,B …) but leave the words .
- Tell Ss they are going to listen to a paragraph about
the activities taking place in an emergency room
which contains the words on the board

- Put the words in the table

Guess key

ambulance
wheelchair
crutches
eye chart
scale
stretcher

3
2
6
4

5
1
- Have Ss copy and guess the order of the words
- Play the tape and ash Ss to listen

- Ask Ss to give their answers and correct
b). True / False statements

- Stick the chart with the statements on the board :
1. A doctor is wheeling a patient into the emergency
room .

2. The patient,_{s head is bandaged}

3. A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with a patient
sitting on it .

4. The eye chart consists of 28 letters ranging in the
different size .

5. The baby,_{s mother is trying to stop the nurse from}
weighing her baby .

- Ask Ss to read the statements carefully and check
if they understand the meaning of the statements
- Have Ss work in pairs to decide which of the
statements is true and which is false .

- Play the tape and have Ss listen ( 2 or 3 times )
- Call on Ss to read their answers and give feedback

1. False ( a parademic not a doctor )

2. True

3. False ( empty wheelchair not with a patient )

T- Ss / individual work
Groupwork of 4/5 Ss

Individual

Whole class

whole class
Pair work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

4. True

5 . False ( stop her baby from crying )
3 / Post – listening : Write it up

- Have Ss write the story about the activities in the
picture , using the Present Continuous .

“ This is the emergency room in a large hospital
.. “

…

IV / Homework :

1. Do exercise 3, 4/ 56 ( workbook )
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Preparing date: 05/ 01/ 2010
Period 56 Unit 9

A first aids course
lesson 3: Read

A / Aims and Objectives :

<i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to read for the instructions about some more </i>
<i>situations requiring first </i>–<i> aid </i>

B/ Language content

fainting, shock, burns, victim elevate, revive, force smbd to do smth, let smbd do smth
C/ Teaching aids : Textbook , chart , picture / drawing , mimes , 4 cardboards .

D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Bingo

- Ask Ss to give nouns for emergencies which require
first – aid and write them on the board ( burn , cut ,
bee sting , snake bite , fainting , shock , nose bleed )

- Have Ss choose 4 any 4 words on the board and
write them down on a piece of paper .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

- call out the words until someone has ticked all the
four words and shouts “ Bingo “

II / Pre – reading : Introduce the topic of reading
passage and some new words to Ss .

* Pre – teach vocabulary :

- to lie flat ( mime / drawing )
- to elevate >< to lower

- a victim : a person who needs first aid
- to overheat : make something too hot
- tissue damage = ton hai mo

- to ease = to stop
- Have Ss copy .

* Checking technique : Rub out and remember
* Network

- Draw the network with some examples on the board
- Ask Ss to think of what to do in these emergency
cases .

- Collect and write the students, _{ideas on the bard}

III / While – reading :

- Have Ss open their books and read the instructions
page 83

- Ask Ss to go to the board and add the missing
information .

1. Matching :

- Ask Ss to read the statements / page 84 and match
tree Leadings A , B , C to them .

Give feedback A -> a , c , e B -> b C -> d
2. Grid

- Draw the grid on the board .

- Ask Ss to read the instructions again and fill the
information .

- Call on some Ss to the board to write their answers
- Give feedback

Cases Do Don,_t

Fainting

- Leave the patient
lying flat .

- Elevate the patients,
feet or lower his / her
head .

- Do not force
him / her to sit
or stand .

Shock

- Give him / her a
cup of tea when he /
she revives .

- Do not
overheat the
victim with
blankets or coat
- Do not give the

T – Ss

Whole class

Individual

Individual

Pair work

Group work

burn fainting

First-aid

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

victim any food
or drink or drug .

Burns

- Cool the burn
immediately to
minimize the tissue
damage .

- Put the affected
part under a running
cold tap .

- Ease the pain with
ice or cold water
packs .

- Cover the burned

area with a thick
sterile dressing .

- Have Ss copy the grid in their notebooks .
IV / Post – reading :

- Ask Ss to work in groups to continue discussing how
to give first aid .

- Call on some volunteers from each group to
demonstrate in front of class .

V / Homework :

1. Let Ss do the exercises 6,7 in the workbook .
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Ng y 11/ 01/ 2010à

WEEK 22

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

A first aids course
Lesson 4 : Write

A / Aims and Objectives :

<i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to write a thank </i>–<i> you note . </i>

B/ Language content

To be looking forward to + V-ing
To thank So for smth

to cheer So up
to come over

C/ Teaching aids : Posters , drawing

D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Shark attack

( Revised words : lie flat , elevate , lower , victim ,
ease )

 Lead in the new lesson .
II / Pre – writing :

Introduce the topic of the writing and some new
words to Ss

- to thank Sb for sth

Eg : She thanked me for helping her

- to cheer Sb up = to make Sb feel happier

T- Ss

T- Ss
- to come over ( translation )

Have Ss copy

* Checking technique : slap the board
Set the scene

- Ask Ss to close their books and listen “ Nga was
sick and she had to go to the hospital . After she left
the hospital , she wrote a thank – you note to
Hoa . Why and what did she write ? “

3. True / False Predictions

- Hang the poster with the statements on the board
a. Nga writes to thank Hoa for some come candy .
b. Hoa,_{s gift cheered Nga up .}

c. Nga ,_{d like Hoa to see her at the hospital .}
d. Nga is very bored now .

e. Nga writes the letter at the hospital .
- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict .

- Get S to give their predictions and write them on
the board .

- Ask Ss to look at the letter and complete it with
the right verb forms .

- Monitor and help Ss with the tense forms .
- Call on some Ss to give their answers and give
feedback .

- Ask Ss to read the whole letter and check if their
prediction are right or not .

<i>Answer key : </i>

1. False -> flower ( not candy ) 2. True
3. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital )
4. True

5. False -> at her house ( not at the hospital )
III / While – writing : Questions and answers
- Tell Ss they are going to write a thank – you note
to a friend and invite him / her to go on a picnic

Whole class
Teacher

Individual
Individual

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

with them .

- Ask Ss to read the questions carefully to answer
orally

- Have Ss practice speaking to each other .
- Monitor and correct .

- Get Ss to join the sentences into a paragraph to
make it a thank – you note .

- Tell Ss to write their letters in their exercise
notebooks .

IV / Post – writing : Exhibition

- Divide the class into 4 groups and choose a letter
randomly in each group .

- Compare their letters and correct .

- Call on some more Ss to read their letters for class
- Give feedback and correct .

V / Homework :

1. Ask Ss to use the same format to write another
letter to another friend for another occasion .
2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

T – Ss

Pairwork
Individual

Groupwork
Individual
Teacher
Individual

Preparing date: 12/ 01/ 2010

Period 58 Unit 9

A first aids course
lesson 5 : language focus

A/ Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to use in“
<i>order to , so as to to indicate purpose , Future simple and Modal will to make </i>“ “ “

<i>requests , offers and promises . </i>
B/ Language content

In order to + V-infinitive
So as to + V-infinitive
Simple future tense

C / Teaching aids : Textbook , chalks , boards …

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

I / Warm up :

-Have students play the game “Completing sentenses”
Divide the class into 2 groups. Group 1gives a

sentence and group 2 complete the sentence by using
“to do” or “for doing” indicate purposes
II / Revision and Practice

1. Revision

- Ask Ss to repeat the uses and forms of “ In order to /
so as to + V infinitive “ “ Future simple “ and “

Modal Will “

- Summarize and hang the charts with models and
uses of them .

+ Negative purposes :

<i>In order not to + V / So as not to + V</i>

Eg : You have to take your warm clothes with you in
order not to get bad cold.

- Have Ss copy .
2. Practice :

- Ask Ss to look at the books and do the exercises .
- Do them orally first , then copy them in their

exercise notebooks

Ex 1 : Matching

- Ask Ss to read the example aloud and ask them to
match one part of a sentence from column A with
another part in column B

- Get Ss to exchange their answers to correct for each
other .

- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give
feedback

1- f , 2- c , 3- b
4 – e , 5- a , 6- d
Ex 2 : Future simple

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue and
exchange their roles.

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback

1. will 2. will 3. won,_t
4. Shall 5. will 6. ,_ll

Ex 3: Making requests , offers and promises with will
- Explain the aims of the exercise

- Ask Ss to read each situation and work in pairs to
complete the dialogue.

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Give feedback :

a. Will you open the window , please , Nga ?
b . will you give it to me , please ?

c. Will you answer the telephone , please ?
d. Will you turn on the TV , please , Nga ?

e. Will you pour a glass of water for me , please ?
f. Will you get me a cushion , please ?

Ex 4 : Work with a partner

- Explain the aims of the exercise
- Ask Ss to read the example aloud .

- Get Ss to read all the words in the box . Be sure Ss to
understand the meaning of them and each situation .
- Have Ss work in pairs to make requests , offers or
promises

- Call on some pairs to read their answers aloud .
- Give feedback

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

Period 59 Preparing date: 12/ 01/ 2010
Unit 10

Recycling
lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read
A / Aims and objectives :

<i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to do something to protect the environment and </i>
<i>save natural resources </i>

B / Language content
1.Grammar

Passive forms
2.Vocabulary

reduce, reuse, recycle, protect environment, Friends of the earth.
C/ Teaching aids :

<i>Textbook , posters , cassette , 6 flashcards , a chart …</i>
D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E/ Procedure :

I / Warm up : Brainstorming (Getting started)
Reuse plastic bags

- Ask Ss to think of ways to reduce the amount of
garbage they produce .

- Deliver posters to Ss , dividing them into 4 groups
- Tell Ss to put the posters on the board after they
finish and the team having the most good ideas is the
winner .

- Give feedback

( Use cloth bags , use tree leaves to wrap things ,
make garbage into fertilizer , make vegetable matter
into animal food … )

 Lead in to new lesson .
II / Pesentation

Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some
new words to Ss .

1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- representative (n) = dai dien

- to protect = to keep so/ sth safe from danger .
-> to protect so / sth from so / sth

- natural resource (n) : coal mines , oil / gold / mineral
deposits

- to recycle “ to make sth already used able to be used
again .

- to contact = to communicate with so by telephone or
letter .

-> Have Ss copy .

* Checking technique : Jumbled words

Group work of 4/5
teams

Individual

Teacher – Ss

Whole class
Ways to reduce

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

- Stick 6 flashcards with jumbled words on the board

- Ask Ss to rewrite the words in the right order .
- Tell Ss the first two groups with right words will get
2 points .

- Correct and give feedback

contact – representative – resource
natural – protect – recycle

2. True / false predictions

- Set the scene “ A representative from Friends of the
<i>Earth , Miss Blake , is talking to the students of </i>
<i>Quang Trung School . Friends of the Earth shows </i>
<i>people how to protect the environment and save </i>
<i>natural resources “ </i>

- Put the chart with the statements on the board .
1. Friends of the Earth is an organization to help
people make friends with each other .

2. Miss Blake asks the students to remember 3
things : reduce , reuse , recycle .

3. Reduce means buying the products which are over
packed .

4. We can not reuse things like envelopes , glass ,
plastic bottles , old plastic bags .

5. Miss Blake says that we should use cloth bags and
should not use plastic bags at all .

6. Recycling means not just throwing things away but
trying and finding another use for them .

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements
are true or false .

- Call on some Ss to read their guesses and write them
on the board .

III Practice

1. Checking predictions

- Ask Ss to open their books , listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue .

- Call on Ss to correct the false statements .
- Give feedback

1. False -> an organization to help people
2. True

3. False -> Reduce means not buying …
4. False -> We can reuse things …
5. True 6. True

2. Comprehension questions :

- Ask Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs .

Group work of 4/5 Ss

Teacher – Ss

Pair work
Individual

Whole class
tconatc psentreretive

a ceresoru

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

- Monitor and help Ss with their work

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions .

- Give feedback

a. Reduce means not buying products which are over
packed .

b. We can reuse things like envelopes , glass , plastic
bottles and old plastic bags .

c. Recycle means not just throwing things away . Try
and find another use for them .

d. We can look for information on recycling things by
having a contact with an organization like Friends of
the Earth , going to the local library or asking your
family and friends .

e. We should not use plastic bags because when we

throw them away , they could stay very long and
could not be self- destroyed .

IV / Consolidation

Discussion

<i>How to protect our environment ?</i>

“ ”

- Ask Ss to express their opinions / ideas on this
topic .

- Write their ideas on the board into a list
- Give feedback , correct and hove them copy .
V / Homework :

1. Write the questions and full answers in your
exercise notebook .

2. Do the exercises ( 1,2 ) in the Workbook .

Pair work

Individual

Individual

Ng y 18/ 01/ 2010à

WEEK 23 Preparing date: 20/ 01/ 2010
<i> Period 60 </i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

lesson 2 : Speak + listen
A / Aims and Objectives :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice giving and responding to
<i>instructions and listening for specific information about making compost . </i>
B / Language content

paper, metal, fabric, leather, glass
compost, heap, shells, moiture

C / Teaching aids : Picture , a mapped dialogue chart , realia , cassette <i>…</i>
D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually

E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Kim,_{s game}

* Possible answers : Used paper , old newspapers ,
books , cardboard boxes , bottles , glasses , jars ,
plastic bags , food cans , drinking tins , vegetable
matter , clothes , shoes , school bags …

I/ Speak

1) Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking
and some new words to students .

* Pre-teach vocabulary :

- Fertilizer (n) : Farmer often use this thing to make
their plants or trees grow well .

-> to fertilize

- Compost (n) : What do you call the fertilizer made
from spoiled food , leaves , vegetable mater ?

-> compost heap
- Fabric (n) = material

- Leather (n) : What are the shoes made of ?
+ Have Ss copy in their notebooks .

 Checking technique : Bingo
** Dictation list :

- Tell Ss they are going to listen to the words for items
and put them into the right groups .

- Draw the table on the words and put them in the
right columns .

- Model some words .

- Read the words aloud , slowly and jumble them up
- After listening , ask Ss to work in pairs and give
their answers .

- Read the words again and correct

Group Items

Paper used paper (old newspaper ,cardboard
boxes

Glass ( bottles , glasses , jars )
Plastic (Plastic bags , plastic bottles )
Metal ( food cans , drinking tins ..)
Fabric Clothes ( cloth bags , material )
Leather ( shoes , sandals , schoolbags )
Vegetable

matter Fruit Peels ( vegetable , rotten fruits )
2) While – speaking :

Mapped dialogue :

- Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board .
- Elicit the exchanges from students

- Have some pairs practice each exchange before
going on to another exchange .

Whole class
Team work

Teacher – Ss

Individual

Individual
Pair work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

- After fishing the dialogue , ask a good pair to
demonstrate the whole dialogue .

+ Open pairs :

- Ask some pairs to practice in front of class .
3) Post-speaking

+ Closed pairs :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information
with the words in the dictation list

- Monitor and correct .

A B

Which group ( do
clothes ) belong to ?
What can we do with
( those clothes ) ?
Is / are ( fruit vegetable
matter ) ?

What will we do with
(it ) ?

Put ( them ) in fabric
We can ( recycle them
and make them into
paper or shopping bags .
That is right

We make ( it into
compose and fertilizer
our field . )

III/Listen

1) Pre-listening

-Give students some new words in the listening
compost heap

tea leaves
egg-shell
moisture

condensation

Teacher: You are going to listen to an expert talking
about the way to make compost. First you look at the
questions and have a guess of the information in the
tape.

2) While-listening

- Have students listen to the tape twice or three times
and choose the correct answers

-Ask students to compare their answers with their
partners

-Ask some students to read their answers
-Give the correct answers:

a) A b) B
c) A d) B
3) Post-listening

- Ask students to put these phrases in the order of the
compost – making process.

1.Use shovels to turn th compost.
2.Start a compost heap.

3.Water the compost.
4.Place in the garden

5.Use as fertilizer

6.Kepp for sixs months.
2-4-1-3-6-5

V / Home work :

1. Copy down the dialogue , replacing the
information.

2. Do the exercises 5,6 in the work book.

Pair work

Individual

-Write new words in
the notebooks

-Listen to the teacher

-Listen to the tape
-Compare

Individual

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Preparing date: 20/ 01/2010
<i> Period 61 </i>

Unit 10
Recycling
Lesson 4 : Read

A / Aims and Objectives :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in the Present Simple
B / Language content

Passive voice

C / Teaching aids : word square chart . pictures , drawing ..
D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Word square

E N V I R O N M E N T

N B C G A R B A G E R

V E D R D O P P U R E

E J U E Y I L A R S C

L U S E D P A P E R Y

O S T N O T S E D E C

P R O T E C T R U U L

E A B R C A I B C S E

R E C E E N C A E E K

D E E E F G H G I J L

- Tell Ss the topic about the environment and there
are 12 hidden words .

- Divide the class into 4 groups .

- Ask Ss to write their answers on a piece of paper
and hand in when they finish

- Tell Ss the group with the most right words is the
winner .

Answer key :

environment , garbage , pure ,
used paper , protect .
envelope , dust , green tree ,
can , plastic , paper bag ,
reduce , reuse , recycle

II / Pre – reading :Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .

1. Pre- teach vocabulary :
- tire (n) : using picture
- pipe (n) : using drawing

- deposit (n) : khoan tien gui vao mot tai khoan

Group work of 4 teams

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

- to refill = to fill something empty again
- to melt >< to freeze

- Get Ss to copy in their notebooks .

* Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember
2. Open prediction

- Tell Ss they are going to read a page in a newspaper
giving some recycling facts to protect the

environment .

- Ask them to look at the board and guess what they
are going to read .

+ What do people do with used things ?

+ What can they make from them ?

- Call on some Ss to read their guesses on the board
Car ties -> …………..

Milk bottles ->………
Glass -> …………..
Drink cans -> …………..

Household and garden waste -> ……… ….
III / While – reading :

1. Grid

- Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it
- Ask Ss to open their books and read the text .
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of recycling
facts mentioned in the text .

- Call on some Ss to write the information in the grid
on the board .

Answer Key :

Used things Recycling Facts
Car tires

Milk bottles
Glass

Drink cans
Household and
garden waste

are recycled to make pipes and
floor recoverings

are cleaned and refilled
(with milk )

is broken up , melted and made
into new glassware

are brought back for recycling
is made into compost .

2. Comprehension questions

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions .
- Get them to compare their answers with their
friends .

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions .

- Give feedback

a. People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles .
b. The glass is broken up , melted and made into new
glassware .

c. The Oregon government made a new law that
there must be a deposit on all drink cans . The
deposit is returned when people bring the cans back
for recycling .

d. Compost is made from household and garden
waste .

e. If we have a recycling story to share , we can call
or fax the magazine at 5 265 456.

IV / Post – reading :

- Ask Ss to look at their books and complete the
sentences to make a list of recycled things .

Whole class

Individual

Whole class
Pair work

Pair work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud .
=> The sentences they have read are the passive .

Passive Form in the present Simple

S + am/ is / are + Past participle

- It is used when the subject is affected by the action
of the verb .

- How to change an active sentence to a passive
voice :

Active S V O
Passive S + be + PII by O
eg : I love you

You are loved by me
Have Ss copy

 Change these sentences into the passive
1. Lan like pop music .

2. They play table tennis every day

3. We do these exercises in the notebooks .
4. He feeds 5 chickens .

5. She buy a lot of food .

- Call on some Ss to read their completed sentences
in front of class .

- Give feedback

1. Pop music is liked by Lan .
2. Table tennis is played every day

3. These exercises are done in the notebooks by us .
4. Five chickens are fed by him

5. A lot of food is bought by her .
V / Homework :

1. Copy down all the passive sentences in their note
books .

2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

Whole class

Individual

Listen and copy .

Preparing date: 20/ 01/ 2010
<i> Period 62 </i>

Unit 10
Recycling
lesson 4 : Write

A / Aims and Objectives :

<i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a set of instructions , using the </i>
<i>sequencing .</i>

B / Language conten

C / Teaching aids : drawing ,, mime , picture …

D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure:

I / Warm up : Lucky numbers

- Write 9 numbers on he board from 1 to 9
1. Lucky number

2. Say this sentence in he passive “ people
speak English everywhere “

3. Say this sentence in the active “ cartoons
are liked by most children “

4. Lucky number

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

5. Lucky number

6. Say this sentence in the passive “ We do
not use things carefully . “

7. Say this sentence in the active “ Are
candies liked by the children ? “

8. Say this sentence in the passive “ Mr Han
teaches Maths . “

9. Say this sentence in the passive “
Vegetables do not eat meat . “
- Divide the class into 2 teams .

II / Pre- writing : Introduce the topic of the
writing and some new words to Ss

1. Pre-teach vocabulary :

- to soak : put sth in liquid for a time so that
it becomes completely wet .

- to mash : mime

- wire mesh (n) : luoi dien
- bucket (n) : drawing
-> Have Ss copy down .

* Checking vocabulary : Slap the board

Listen and copy

Teacher – Ss
Team work

2. Ordering prediction :

- Set the scene : tell Ss they are going to read a text
about how to recycle used paper .

- Put the verbs on the board randomly in a flow chart
- Ask Ss to work in groups to predict the order of the
actions

soak dry pull out mix press mash
1 2 3
4 5 6

- Call on about 2 pairs to write their answers on the
board .

- Explain the process of recycling , using mimes or
Vietnamese and correct .

- Feedback

1. soak 2. mash 3. mix
4. pull out 5. press 6. dry
III / While – writing :

- Ask Ss to open their books , read the text and fill in

the verbs

- Monitor and correct the exercise in the text book .
- Feedback

1. use 2. mix 3. place 4. press
5. wrap 6. wait 7. dry

* Recall

- Ask Ss to close their books

- Write the sequencing on the board and have Ss to
practice speaking first

- Call on Ss to say the sentences from memory .

- Get Ss to write the text in brief using the sequencing
.

- Monitor and help Ss with their work .

- Call on some Ss to read their writing for the class .
- Feedback

First , soak old newspaper in a bucket overnight .

Teacher

Group work of 4/ 5

Ss

Individual

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

Then , mash the paper by a wooden spoon .
Next , mix the mashed paper with water .

After that , use a wire mesh to pull the mixture out ,
put it on the cloth and press it down firmly .

Finally , take the mesh out of the cloth & dry it in the
sun .

IV / Post – writing : Ordering pictures
- Stick the pictures on the board randomly

- Ask Ss to listen and work in groups to rearrange the
pictures according to the instructions on how to
prepare the tealeaves .

- Read the instructions aloud

a. First take the used tealeaves from the tea pot .
b. Next scatter the tealeaves on a tray .

c. Then dry the leaves in the sun .

d. Finally , put the dry leaves in a pot for future use .

V / Homework :

1. Write the instructions on how to make a thing you
have ever made using the sequencing

2. Prepare the next lesson .

Group work

Individual

Ng y 25/ 01 2010à

WEEK 24 Preparing date: 22/ 01/ 2010
Period 63

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

Lesson 5 : Language focus

A / Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in
<i>Present simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives .</i>

B/ Language content
Passive forms

Adjectives followed by- an infinitive
- a noun clause.

C / Teaching aids : Cardboards , poster , handouts ….

D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Questions game

- Call on a student to go to the board and give him or
her a job name .

- Ask the rest of the class to guess the job by asking
yes-no questions

- The chosen student can only answer yes or no
- Tell someone who can guess the right job will get a
point and take the place of the last chosen student .
Example questions :

- Do you get a big salary ?
- Do you wear uniform ?
II / Revision and practice
1. The passive forms

1.1 Passive Form in the Present Simple
S + am / is / are + past participle

=> It is used when the subject is affected by the action
of the verb .

Ex 1 : Work with a partner
- Ordering pictures :

+ Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the
pictures to put them in the correct order according to
the instructions

+ Call on some groups to give their answers .
+ Give feedback a.1 b.4 c.3 d.5 e.2 f.6
- Writing :

+ Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form
+ Let them compare their writing and ask Ss to go to
the board and write their sentences

+ Correct and give feedback

1.2 Passive Form in the Future Simple

S + will / shall + be + past participle
- Have Ss copy down

- Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in the
gaps , using the Passive

- Call on Ss to give their answers and correct
1. … will be shown

2. Will … be built …..?
3. … will be finished …. 4.
Will … be made … ?

2. Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun clause

2.1. It + be + adjective + to infinitive

Example : It is very difficult to speak English well
Ex 3 : Complete the sentences

- Ask Ss to open their books and complete the
dialogues

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and

Individual

Teacher – Ss

Pair work

Pair work

Teacher – Ss

Individual

Whole class

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

correct

2.2 . S + be + adj + that / noun clause

Example : We are delighted that you passed the
English exam .

- Get Ss to copy .

Ex 4 : Complete the letter

- Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words .

A B Key

1. relieved (a)
2. Congratulation
3. Look forward to(
4. confirm (v)

a. xin chuc mung
b. trong cho
c. xac nhan lai
d. nhe nhom

1.d
2.a
3.b
4. c
- Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary

- Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using
the words in the box

- Get some Ss to give their answers
- Give feedback and correct

0. are delighted
1. was happy
2. am relieved
3. is afraid
4. Are … sure …
5. am certain

- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud
III/ Further practice

Rewrite the sentences , using" It is + Adj + to Verb"
1. To see our old friends again is wonderful.

2. To be with you is fun.

3. To understand him is difficult.
IV / Consolidation

- Remind the passive forms in present simple and
future simple.

S + is/ am/ are + PII
S + will/ shall + be + PII.

- Remind structure of Adj with "to infinitive" and
noun clause.

+ It + be + Adj + to infinitive

+ S + Be + Adj + that + Noun clause.
V / Homework :

1. Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,_s

grandparents are delighted that he passed his English
exam …”

2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

Teacher – Ss
Whole class

Individual

Read the letter aloud
Listen and copy

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

<i> </i>

<i> Preparing date: 24/ 01/ 2010</i>
Period 64 Unit 11

Traveling around Viet Nam
lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use some
<i>expressions to express their interest </i>

B / Language content
1. Grammar

Would you mind + V-ing ?
Do you mind + V-ing ?

Do you mind if S + V( present tense)?
Would you mind if S + V (past tense)?
2. Vocabulary

Front seat, water buffalo, rice paddy, crop, sugar cane, take a photo.
C / Teaching aids : Cassette , 2 charts …

D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Jumbled words

- Write the topic “ Places of interest “ on the board

- Ask each team to connect the words to make the right
phrases for places of interest and write them on the
board as fast as possible

=> Ngo Mon Gate , Ha long Bay , The Temple

Literature , Nha rong Harbor .

* Getting Started :

- Ask Ss to open their books and match the names with
the pictures

- Call on some Ss to give their answers
a. Ngo Mon Gate b. Na rong Harbor
c. The Temple Literature

d. Ha Long Bay

- Call some Ss to read the proper names aloud .
II / Presentation :

Team work

Individual

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some
new words to students .

- Crop (n) : something such as grain , rice , fruit … is
grown in one season .

- Sugar cane (n) : cay mia ( It is used to make sugar )
- Water buffalo (n) : con trau

- forty – minute drive : The drive takes 40 minutes
Form : A / an Adj ( number ) – N + N

Ex : a3 – month vacation / a thirteen – year – old
– boy

* Checking vocabulary : Bingo
*Guiding questions :

- Set the scene and put the chart with questions on the
board

a. where does Hoa meet The Jones ?

b. Is it the first time The Jones have visited Viet Nam?
c. How do they travel to Ha Noi ?

d. What do they see along the road to Ha Noi ?
e. What would Tim like to do ?

- Ask Ss to think about the questions in a few minutes
- Have Ss listen to the tape while reading the dialogue
- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions
- Call on some pairs to give their answers

- Feedback :

a. Hoa meets The Jones at the airport
b. Yes , it is . c. By taxi

d. They see a boy riding a water buffalo , rice paddies ,
corn and sugar cane fields

e. He would like to take a photo .
III / Practice

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and say out True or False
- Read the sentences aloud and call on some Ss to
answer , then have them correct the false sentences and
get them to write in their notebooks .

a. T b. T d. T e . T
c. F -> … in a taxi

f. F -> … Not only rice and corn but also sugar canes
are grown around Ha Noi .

- Call on some groups of five to practice the dialogue in
front of class

- Correct their pronunciation

IV / Consolidation Discussion

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again , discuss with them
and ask them to pick out the sentences containing the
situations mentioned below .

* to express interest :

- I,_{d like you to meet my parents}…_.
- It is nice to meet you ….

- It is great to be in Viet Nam .
- I would to sit with Tim …..
* to express a request :

- Would you mind sitting in the front seat …
- Would you mind if I took a photo ?

V / Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words and some structures to
give some examples .

2. Do the exercises in the workbooks .

Teacher – Ss

individual and choral

Whole class

Individual
Pair work

Whole class

Individual

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

Period 65 Preparing date: 24/ 01/ 2010
Unit 11

Traveling around Viet Nam
Lesson 2 : speak + LISTEN

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make and respond
<i>to formal requests using mind and make suggestions .</i>“ “

<i> Listening about the place directions and information about some places of interests in </i>
<i>Vietnam.</i>

B / Language content

Would you mind + V-ing?

Would you mind if + S + V( past tense)?
Do you mind + V-ing?

Do you mind if + S + V( present tense)?
C / Teaching aids : a mapped dialogue chart …

D/ Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : What does it say ?

- Choose a student and ask him / her to go to the front
of the class with his / her back to the board so that he /
she can not see what is written on the board .

- Write the information on the board .

- Ask the rest of the class try to help the student guess
what is written on the board by asking questions until
he / she says out right the words on the board .

Example : Yes, I do .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

Ss ask : Do you like your teacher ?
Or Every day

Ss ask : How often do you have a shower ?
II / Speak

1) Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking
and some structures

* Pre- teach structures :
- Set the scene :

Remind Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr.
Jones and between Hoa and Tim in the last dialogue
and elicit the sentences from Ss .

Model sentences :

1. A : Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the
taxi ?

B : No problem .

2. A : Would you mind if I took a photo ?
B : Not at all .

=> Used to make and respond to formal requests
Form :

1. Would you mind / Do you mind + verb- ing …?
2. Would you mind if I + Verb ( in Past simple tense)

…?

Do you mind if I + Verb ( in Present simple
tense ) ..?

Responses :

 Agreement:

No , I do not mind . / No , of course no . / Not at
all . / Please do . / Please go head .

 Disagreement :

I am sorry , I can not / I am sorry , it is impossible
I,_{d prefer you did not . / I},_{d rather you did not .}
- Get Ss to copy and give some more examples with
suggested words

2. Cardboard Drill
1. move your car ? (v )
2. go out with me ? ( x)
3. wait for me ? (x)
4. Get / coffee ? (v)
5. Smoke ? (x)

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
2) While – speaking :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs

+ Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate the
exchanges

+ Close pairs : get the whole class to practice all the
exchanges

- Give feedback
Mapped dialogue

You Tourist officer

Excuse me !

I would like to visit a
market. Would you
mind suggesting one ?

Yes ?
Not at all .

How about goping to
Thai Binh Market ?
It opens from about
5 am to pm .

Teacher – Ss

Whole class

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

That sounds

interesting . Thank

you . You are welcome .

+ Open pairs : Ask some pairs to demonstrate the
dialogue .

+ Closed pairs : have Ss open their books and use the
information / 101 to practice other dialogues .

Group 1 : Markets Group 2 : Museums
Group3 : Restaurants Group 4 : Stamps
Group 5 : Zoo and Botanical Garden
3) Post – speaking :

- Call on some volunteers from each group to practice
in front of class .

- Rewrite the completed dialogues in their note books
III / Listen

1)Pre- listening : Introduce the topic of the listening
and some new words

- Highway ( n)

- Tourist information center (n)

* Set the scene “ The Jones family are going around
Ha Noi and they are talking about the directions to 5
places in the maps . Listen to them and match the
places to the correct positions on the maps “
- Have Ss guess their correct positions on the map
- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board.

2) While – listening :

- Ask Ss to list the places on the maps .
- Play the tape 2 or 3 times

- Ask Ss to compare their answers with their friends .
- Call on some Ss to read their answers and give the
correct answers

Answer key :

a) restaurant b) hotel c) bus station
d) pagoda e) temple

- Play the tape once more to check the answers
( pause at some important paragraph )

3) Post – listening :

- Have Ss repeat chorally while listening to the tape .
- Correct their pronunciation

V / Homework :

1. Do the exercises in the workbook .
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Teacher – Ss
Pair work

Individual
Individual
Individual
Teacher – Ss

Whole class
Work in group
Individual
Pair work
Individual

Whole class
Listen and copy

Ngµy 01/ 02/ 2010

WEEK 25 Preparing date: 27/ 01/ 2010
Period 66 Unit 11

Traveling around Viet Nam

Lesson 3 : Read

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

B / Language content

Seaside resort, Oceanic Institude, Giant Buddha, Offshore island, External Spring,
waterfall, moutainous resort, tribal village moutain slope, magnificient, limestone island.
C / Teaching aids : Cassette , Pictures of cities , 2 posters , gap fill chart …

D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually

E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Word square
Tourist sites

A D D Y R E S O R T

D C A T G B E A C H

K N L R Y S A P A E

B U A I M K S A P C

A H T B V B I P J I

C A V E S L D K I T

H L N L A K E C T A

M O U N T A I N R D

A N H A T R A N G E

A G G E F G X C U L

- Ask Ss to find 13 hidden words and write them on a
piece of paper .

Answer Key :

resort , beach , Sa Pa , caves , lakes
mountains , Nha Trang

Bach Ma , Ha Long , Da lat , Tribe
Seaside , The citadel

II / Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .

* Pre – teach vocabulary :

- accommodation (n) : a place to live , work or stay
in

- giant (adj ) = huge / very big
- slope (n)

- jungle (n) = a very thick forest
- limestone (n) = da voi

- florist (n) : a person who sells flowers
- to import >< to export

* Checking vocabulary : What and where
III / While – reading :

1. Grid :

- Ask Ss to read the advertisements about the resorts
and check (v) the topics mentioned in the grid

- Get Ss to work in pairs to compare their answer
- Call on some Ss to give their answers

Answer Key :
Nha Trang :

Flights to Ha Noi , railway , hotels , local transport ,
tourist attractions .

Da Lat :

Hotels , local transport , waterfalls , tourist
attractions

Sa Pa :

Hotels , local transport , mountain slopes tourist
attractions , villages .

Ha Long Bay :

World Heritage , tourist attractions , sand beaches ,
railways , hotels , caves , locals transport .

Team work

Individual

Teacher – Ss

Whole class
Individual
Pair work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

- Have Ss copy down
2. Matching :

- put the poster on the board and ask Ss to match the
words or phrases in Column A to column B

A B

1. Nha Trang
2. Da lat
3. Sa Pa
4. Ha long
Bay

5. Nha Rong
Harbor

a. tribal villages , mountain
climbing

b. The place where President Ho
Chi Minh left Viet Nam in 1911.
c. Swimming and sunbathing .

d. Oceanic Institute

e. Flower gardens .

- Ask Ss to go to the board and draw the lines to
connect the words

Answer Key :

1. d 2.e 3.a 4.c 5.b
3. Grid

- Get Ss to open their books , read the text on page
105 and check (v) the boxes .

- Monitor and correct .

IV / Post – reading : Role play

- Tell Ss to ask and answer questions using the
information in the text .

+ Write the model on the board .
A : Where should ( Andrew ) go ?
B : He should go to ( Sa Pa ) .
A : Why ?

B : Because ( he studies tribes and he likes mountain
– climbing )

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice speaking .
- Monitor and correct

- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
V / Homework :

1. Redo the exercises and copy in their notebooks .
2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Individual

Individual

Pair work
Teacher – Ss

Pair work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

Preparing date: 27/ 01/ 2010
Period 67 Unit 11

Traveling around Viet Nam

lesson 5 : write

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to write a
<i>narrative , using a guided composition .</i>

B / Language content
Past simple tense

Vocabulary: to paddle, to overturn, to rescue, to hire.
C / Teaching aids : pictures , gap fill charts , cardboards
D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E/ Procedure

I / Warm up : Which word ?

( Get Ss to study the definition of a narrative by a gap
fill )

- Put the missing words on the board and have Ss
study first :

written – climax – attention – brief – events
- Show the chart and ask Ss to ill in the gaps with the
words in the box .

A narrative is a sequence of ….(1)…. These events
<i>are usually ….(2)… in chronological order and often</i>
<i>lead to a …(3) … The first sentence of a narrative </i>
<i>should get the reader,s …(4)… and the ending should</i>
<i>be ….(5)…</i>

- Ask Ss of each group to go to the board and write the

words as fast as possible .

- Explain the definition in Vietnamese
Answer key :

1. events 2. written 3. climax 4. attention 5. brief
II / Pre- writing : Introduce the topic of the writing
and some new words to Ss .

* Pre – teach Vocabulary
- canoe (n) : using picture

- to paddle (mime ) -> paddle (n)
- to hire : thue muon

- to overturn : lat up / lat do

- to rescue = to save somebody ,_{s life from danger}
+ Get Ss to copy down .

* Checking vocabulary : Slap the board
* Ordering statements : Setting the scene “<i> Last </i>
<i>week , while on vacation in Da lat , The Jones family </i>
<i>had quite an unforgettable adventure on Xuan Huong </i>
<i>Lake . What did they do and what happened to them ?</i>
“

- Ask Ss to read the first part of the story / 105 and
rearrange the sentences / 106 to complete the story .

Group work of 4/5 Ss

Ss

Teacher – Ss

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

- Call on some pairs to give their answers and correct .
- Get some Ss to read the story aloud for the class and
correct pronunciation errors .

- Give feedback : c -> a -> g ->d -> f -> b -> e
III / While – writing :

1. Explanation :

- Have Ss look at the pictures / 106 – 107 and guess
the meaning of the new words .

- Explain the meanings of these words
+ to stumble : truot chan

+ to go off : vang ra
+ to realize : nhan ra
- Get Ss to copy
2. Ordering pictures :

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures again and rearrange
the events in the correct chronological order to make

it a story .

- Call on some Ss to give their answers and correct .
- Give feedback : d -> b -> e -> h -> a -> f -> c -> g
3. Write – it – up :

- Ask Ss to use the pictures already rearranged and the
given words to write the story about Uyen .

- Monitor and help Ss with words or structures while
they are writing .

* Notice : The past simple tense is often used in a
narrative .

- Ask them to exchange their writings to correct for
each other .

- Call on some Ss to read their story aloud for he class
- Give feedback :

Uyen had a day to remember last week . she had
<i>a math exam on Friday but she got up late . She </i>
<i>realized her alarm clock did not go off . As he was </i>
<i>leaving home , it started to rain heavily . Uyen tried </i>
<i>to run as fast as she could . Suddenly she stumbled </i>
<i>against a rock and fell onto the road . Her school bag</i>
<i>went into a pool of water and everything got wet . </i>
<i>Strangely , the rain stopped as she got to her </i>

<i>classroom . Luckily , Uyen had enough time to finish </i>
<i>her exam . </i>

IV / Post – writing :

- Call on some Ss to demonstrate the completed story
in front of class .

- Copy the story in their notebooks .
V / Homework :

1. Learn by heart all new words and copy in their
notebooks .

2. Work in groups of 4 writing a story to tell the class
in the next lesson .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Pair work

Teacher – Ss
Whole – class
Individual

Individual

Individual

Individual

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

Preparing date: 28 / 01/ 2010
Period 68 Unit 11

Traveling around Viet Nam
lesson 5 : Language focus

A/ Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Present and
<i>Past participles to describe things and people and the requests with Would / Do you </i>“
<i>mind if …...? and Would / Do you mind + V-ing …….? </i>“

B / Teaching aids : Pictures , cardboards . gap –<i> fill chart ……</i>
C / Procedure :

I / Warm up Memory game

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures / 109 carefully for 20
seconds and close their books .

- Tell them the team having the most right words is
the winner .

- Have Ss open their books again , go through the
words and correct .

Answer Key :

box , lamp truck , flowers , elephant , bear , rabbit

II / Revision and practice

1. Language focus 1 :
* Pre-teach :

- Ask Ss to open their books and look at the picture /
108 and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the
people at Quang Trung school are in the school yard .
What are they doing ? “

- Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then correct .
T : What is Mr Quang doing ?

Ss : He is walking / going up the stairs .
T : What is Miss Lien doing ?

Ss : She is carrying a bag .
T : ( Nam )

Whole class
Team work

Whole class

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

Ss : ( standing next to Miss Lien / talking to Miss
Lien )

T : ( Ba )

Ss : ( sitting under the tree / reading a book )
T : ( Lan )

Ss : ( standing by the table )
T : ( Nga and Hoa )

Ss : ( playing chess )
 Model sentences :

The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang
( present participle phrase )

Form : Verb + ing -> Present participle

Use : A present participle can be used as an adjective
to qualify a noun with active meaning

- Have Ss copy
* Practice :

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to say who each person is ,
using the information above

Example : The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang
- Correct and feedback

2. Language focus 2 :

* Pre –teach : Matching

- Ask Ss to look at the words in the box and the
picture / 109 to do the matching

A B Key

1. box
2. truck
3. lamp
4. doll
5. flowers
6. toys

a. wrap in
b. dress in

c. recycled from
d. keep in

e. made in
f. paint

1. f
2. c
3. e
4. b
5. a
6. d
- Ask Ss to look at the picture / 109 again and answer
the questions :

- Where is the old lamp made in ?
- What color is the box painted ?
- What is truck recycled from ?
- What color is the doll dressed in ?
- What are the flowers wrapped in ?
- Where are the toys kept ?

- Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering
the questions

=> Ask “ How much is the old lamp made in China ?
Model Sentences :

The old lamp made in China is five dollars .
( past participle phrase )

Form : Regular verb + ed Past participle
Irregular verb

Use : a past participle can be used as an adjective to
qualify a noun with passive meaning .

- Have Ss copy
* Practice :

- Ask Ss to look at their books , listen to the questions
and answer

1. T : How much is the box painted green ?

Choral -> individual

Whole class

Individual

Pair work

Teacher – Ss

Choral -> individual

Teacher – Ss

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

St: The box painted green is one dollar

- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering the
questions ( Using the information in the matching )
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class .
3. Language focus 3 :

3.1 Presentation :

- Ask Ss to repeat the models sentences :

Would you mind if + Verb ( in Past simple tense ) ?
Do you mind if + Verb ( in present simple tense ) ?

Do you mind / would you mind + verb – ing ?
+ Agreement :

No , I do not mind . / No , of course not . / Not at
all . / Please do . / Please go ahead .

- Disagreement :

I,_{d prefer you did not . / I},_{d rather you did not .}
=> Meaning : Xin ban cam phien …

- Get Ss to copy .
III/ Further Practice :

Cardboard Drill

- Prepare 4 cardboards with cues including checks (v)
and crosses (x)

a. move / car (v) c. get / coffee (x)
b. put out / cigarette (v) d. wait / moment (x)
Model : T : Would you mind moving your car ?
Ss : No , of course not .

- Call on 2 or 3 Ss to repeat it and correct .

+ Open pairs : Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate in the
class .

+ Closed pairs : Get the whole class to practice

- Go on until the last cue

4. language focus 4 :
4.1 Gap fill

- Put the gap – fill chart on the board .

- Ask Ss to use the right words in the box to fill in the
gaps .

turned off – explain – telling –
ask

1. Would you mind ………. me something about it ?
2. Do you mind if I ………. you a question ?

Teacher – Ss

Whole class

Teacher – Ss
Pair work

Individual

Whole class

Pair work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

3. Would you please ………. this new word to me ?
4. Would you mind if I ……... the television ?

Answer Key : 1.telling 2.ask 3.explain 4. turned off
4.2 Ordering pictures

- Ask Ss to write the numbers and look at the

pictures , listen to the situations and order the pictures
( 1-> 6 )

1. turn on the stereo 2. watch TV while eating
3. sit down 4. postpone the meeting
5. turn on the air – conditioner 6. smoke

- Ask Ss to give their answers 1.d 2.f 3.a 4.c 5.e 6.b
IV / Consolidation

- Get Ss to work in pairs , playing the roles to
demonstrate the exchanges based on the models
below the pictures .

Listen and correct their mistakes .
V / Homework :

1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks .
2. Prepare the next lesson .

Ngµy 08/ 02/ 2010

WEEK 26

Preparing date:06/ 02/ 2010
PERIOD 69

Revision
A/ The aims

-Remind some mains structures. By the end of the lesson students will be able to do
some exercises.

B/ Language content
In order to + V
So as to + V
Passive forms

Adjectives followed by- an infinitive
- a noun clause
Present participle (V-ing)

Past participle ( PII)

Would you mind + V-ing?
Do you mind + V-ing?

Would you mind if + S + V(simple past tense)?
Do you mind if +S + V(simple present tense)?
C/ Teaching aids: sub-board

D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E/ Procedure

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

-Ask students to use the following words and
phrases to write complete sentences.

1. English / speak/ all/world.

2.I/ not meet/ my friends/ 2 months

3.My mother/ go/ Ho Chi Minh city / last year.
II/ Revision and Practice

1)Revision

a) In order to + V
So as to + V

Use: to indicate purposes
b) Passive forms

*Passive form in the present simple
S + is/am/are/ + PII + by O

*Passive form in the future simple
S + will/shall +be + PII +by O

c)*Adjectives followed by an infinitive

It + to be +Adj + to infinitive

*adjective followed by a noun clause
d) *Present participle

+Form: V-ing

+ Use:A present participle can be used as an
adjective to qualify a noun with active meaning
*Past participle

+Form:Regular verb + ed

Irregular verb – column 3

+Use: A past participle can be used as an adjective
to qualify a noun with passive meaning.

e) Request with

Would/ Do you mind + V-ing?

Would you mind if + S + V(past tense)?
Do you mind if + S + V(present tense)?
2)Practice

Exercise1:Combine each pair of the sentences,
using “adjective + to infinitive/ noun clause
structure”

1.They passed all the exams.They are lucky.
2.She can’t come.I’m afraid.

3.We heard about your father’s illness.We are
sorry.

4.He will win the game.I’m sure.

5. Lan received a lot of birthday presents.She was
happy.

Exercise2: Change into Passive Voive:
a Lan buys a house.

b. They will reuse the plastic bags.

c. People speak English all over the world

d. Nam will give me flowers in my next birthday.

III/ Further practice

-Ask students to do the exercise *
<i>Exercise: Complete the sentences:</i>

-Do exercises on the board
1. English is spoken all over the
world.

2.I haven’t met my friends for 2

months

3.My mother went to Ho Chi
Minh city last year.

-Make an example

The girl reading a book is Hoa

-Make an example

The car made in Japan is
expensive.

-Make examples

Would/ Do you mind opening
the door?

Would you mind if I took a
photo?

Do you mind if I sit down?
-Do exercises

1.They are lucky to pass all the
exams.

2. I’m afraid that she can’t
come.

3. We are sorry to hear about
your father’s illness.

4.I’m sure that he will win the
game

5.Lan was happy to receive a lot
of birthday presents.

Answer:

1.A house is bought by Lan
2. The plastic bags will be
reused.

3. English is spoken all the
world

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

1/ It/ difficult/ understand/ this questions
2/ We/ delighted/ you/ pass/ exam

3/ The boy/ read/ book/ Ba

4/ The old lamp/ made/ China/ 5 dollars
5/ mind/ cut / glass

6/ mind/ if / sit here.

IV/ Remember

-Remind the structures
Passive forms

Adjectives followed by- an infinitive
- a noun clause
Present participle (V-ing)

Past participle ( PII)

Would you mind + V-ing?
Do you mind + V-ing?

Would you mind if + S + V(simple past tense)?
Do you mind if +S + V(simple present tenseIV
V/ Homework

1. Copy all the exercises in their notebooks .
2. Prepare the test.

flowers in my birthday.

* Answers:

1/ It’s difficult to understand this
question.

2/ We were delighted that you

passed the exam

3/ The boy reading the book is
Ba

4/ The old lamp made in China
is 5 dollars

5/ would you mind cutting the
glass?

6/ Do you mind if I sit here ?

Preparing date:06/ 02/ 2010
Period 70 Written test 45 ( number 1 )

A / Aims and Objectives : Ss can summarize knowledge they have learnt form unit 9 to
<i>unit 11 to do the test well . </i>

B / Teaching aids : test paper , chalk <i>….</i>
C / Test :

- Deliver the test paper to students .

I / Supply the correct form of the verbs : ( 2,5 ps)
1. Would you mind if I ( take ) ……….. a photo ?

2. Would you mind ( help ) ……… her to finish her homework ?

3. Do you mind if we ( get ) …………... a taxi to town ?

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

5. The man ( talk )……….. to your teacher is my uncle .
II / Rewrite these sentences as directed : ( 2,0 ps )

1. Can I use your pen ? => Do you mind ……….?

2. Could you turn off the TV ? => Would you mind ………..?
3. They built that bridge five years ago . => That bridge ………...

4. The children eat all the vegetables and meat . => All the vegetable ………
III / Complete the sentences with the suitable word or phrase : ( 2,0 ps )

1. Run ( fast / fastly ) and you can catch the bus .

2. Hung promised to try ( him / his ) best in learning English .
3. I prefer walking to ( riding / ride ) a bicycle .

4. It is a ( thirty – minute / thirty – minutes ) drive from here to the city center .
IV / Complete the sentences , using the given words or phrases : ( 1,5 ps )

1. Last year class 11 A / have / terrible experience.

2. One weekend / they decide / go / a picnic / Cuc Phuong National Park .
3. They / get out of / bus / lunch / because everybody / very hungry .

V / Listen .You are going to listen to Lily talking about her self . You are going to listen
twice . Check (v) the correct box for True or False ( 2,0 Ps )

Statements True False

1 Lily comes from China

2 English is important to her as she will need it for her future job
3 She started learning English when she was eighteen .

4 She has a problem with listening .

5 She can understand people when they speak fast .
6 She does not find English difficult to learn .
7 She wants to be an English teacher .

8 She loves English songs , but she does not hope to become a
singer .

Tapescrift :

Hi ! my name is Lily . I come from China . I am a student , a university student .
I am eighteen years old . I am studying English as a foreign language . English is

important to me because I will need ot for my job in the future . I began learning English
when I was very young – at the age of eight . I think that my biggest problem is listening
. People speak very quickly , so I can not understand them . English is really hard for me
to learn , but I like it . I want to be an English teacher ; or I hope to become a singer one
day because I love English songs very much .

<i>The end</i>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

Preparing date: 08/ 02/ 2010
Period 71

COrecting the test
I. Objective:

By the end of the lesson. SS will be able to undersand exam and can using all
grammar easy.

II. Procedure:

T SS

1. Warm-up:

T call some ss on the board repeat old lesson
and write do exercise

- repeat
2. Pre – exam:

T call some ss on the board made exercise
1.2.4

- Listen
T call some is nhận xét and so sánh bài làm.

3. While exam:

T giải thích cách làm và hớng dẫn các em lần
sau làm bài cho tốt.

-Listen

T gives the right answers - Write

4. Homework:

T ask ss at home learn and do exercise - listen

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

WEEK 27

Preparing day: 15/02/2010

Period 72 Unit 12

A Vacation abroad

Lesson 1 : Getting started
Listen and read

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to aware of how to
<i>make accept and decline invitations .</i>

B/ Language content

*Grammar: Making an invitation, making a complaint
*Vocabulary: include, come over, pick SO up, live abroad
C / Teaching aids : Pictures , cassette , chart ( true / false )
D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I Warm up :

1. Guessing game ( Getting started )

- Show the pictures to Ss , one by one , and ask Ss to
guess what country it is .

- Feedback :

a) The USA b) Australia c) Thailand
d) Statue e) Canada f ) Japan

2. Chatting :

T :Where do you want to visit among these countries?

Ss: ………...

T : Why ?

Ss : ………..
II / Presentation

Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some
new words .

1. Pre – teach Vocabulary :
- to include : bao gom , gom co

- to come over : to come to Someone,_{s house to visit}
for a short time

- to pick so up : to come and get so in your car to
drive him / her to a place

- abroad (adv ) = in a foreign country
-> to be / go / travel / live abroad

* Checking Vocabulary : Rub out and remember
2 . True / False Prediction

Individual

Teacher – Ss

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

- Set the scene “ Mrs Quyen is going to the USA for a
vacation . She is ringing her friend , Mrs Smith , to
tell her about the trip . “

- Put the chart on the board and ask Ss to read the
statements

a. Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the airport in
San Francisco .

b. Mrs Smith invite Mrs Quyen and her husband to
stay with her while they are in town .

c. Mrs Quyen does not accept Mrs smith,_{s invitation}
because she wants to stay with a Vietnamese friend of
hers .

d. Mrs Quyen and her husband will be in the USA for
3 days .

e. Mrs Quyen and her husband will come over to Mrs
Smith,_{s place for dinner one night .}

f. Mr Thanh ; Mrs Quyen,_{s husband , goes abroad for}
a business meeting .

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements
are true or false .

- Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write
them on the board .

III / Practice

1. Checking predictions :

- Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape while
reading the dialogue .

- Call on some Ss to correct the false statements .
1. False -> Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from Ha
Noi

2. True

3. False -> .. because her accommodation is included
in her tickets price .

4. True

5. False -> Only Mrs Quyen will come over to Mrs
Smith ,_{s .}

6. True

2. Grid : Complete Mrs Quyen ,_{s schedule}

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and work in pairs
to complete the grid with the information taken from
the dialogue .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board to write the
information in the grid on the board .

Date Mon 25 Tue 26 Wed 27 Thu 28

Schedule coming
to San
Francisco

Going

out Having dinner
with the
Smiths

Leaving
San
Francisco
- Have Ss copy

3. Comprehension Questions

- Ask Ss to look at their books and answer the
questions .

- Let Ss compare their answers with their partner.
- Call on some Ss to answer

- Give feedback and correct
Answer key :

a) No , they won’_{’t. Because they are coming on a tour}
, and their accommodation is included in the ticket

Teacher

Pair work
Teacher – Ss

Individual

Whole class
Pair work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

price , so they will stay at the hotel .

b) No , he won,_{t . Because he will have a business}
meeting in the evening that day .

c) Mrs Smith will pick her up at her hotel .
- Get Ss to copy .

IV / Consolidation

 Grammar Awareness

- Tell Ss to read the dialogue again and pick out the
statements indicating the following situations
1. Making an invitation

2. Accepting an invitation
3. Declining an invitation
4. Making a complaint

- Call on Ss to give their answers and have Ss copy .
1. Would you like to come and stay with us … ?
.. you must come over for dinner one night .

2. Yes , we ,_{d love to but we will only be in town for}
three nights .

3. That is very kind of you but we are coming on a
tour ..

4. Oh . dear . He is always working
V / Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words and structures to give
some more examples .

2. Do the exercises in the workbook
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Whole class

Pair work

Individual

Period 73 Preparing day: 15/02/2010

Unit 12

A Vacation abroad
Lesson 2 : Speak +Listen

A / Aims and Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about their
plans for a trip abroad .

B/ Language content
Via, brochure, itinerary

C / Teaching aids : Photocopied tables , chart ( mapped dialogue ) , realia ..
D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually

E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Quiz

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

2 good marks .

1. What is the end of everything ? ( letter g )

2. What word starts with T , ends with T , and is full of T ?
( Teapot ; Pot -> full of

3. What is the middle of New York City ? ( York )
4. Which river in America has 4 eyes ?( Mississippi )

II/ Speak

1/ Pre – speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking
and some new words to students .

1. Pre – teach vocabulary :

- ( an ) itinerary : a plan for a journey including the route
and the places you visit .

- gallery ( n) : Situation : I go to this place to see works of
arts to be shown . What is it in English ?

- Flight (n) = a journey made by plane
- Via ( pre ) = through a place

- Facilities ( Plural ) : co so vat chat
- Brochure ( realia ) => travel brochure
- Ask Ss to copy .

* Checking vocabulary : Slap the board
a. Matching :

- Show the coppied tables on the right of the board

randomly and ask Ss to match them with the right titles on
the left .

- Write the itinerary on the left .
1. Itinerary

2. Flight
information
3. Hotel
advertisement
4. Travel brochure

- Call on some Ss to go to the board to draw the lines to
match the tables with the titles .

2 / While speaking :
* Tell me about :

- Leave the tables on the board and ask Ss to look at them .
- Go through the tables , asking Ss questions for

information about the flights , accommodation , and tourist
places .

Examples :

 For the flight information table :

+ How many flights a week can you take from Los Angles
to Boston ?

+ Which flight can you take every day of the week ?
 For the Hotel advertisement table :

+ Which of the hotel is cheaper ?

+ How much is the double room in Revere Hotel ?
+ How about the Atlantics Hotel ? …

- Have some students speak in front of class.
** Mapped dialogue :

- Set the scene : “ These people are making a plan for their
trip from Los Angles to Boston . Let,_{s do it with them ! “}
- Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board

- Have some pairs practice exchange before going on to
another exchange .

- After finishing the dialogue , ask a good pair to
demonstrate the whole dialogue

Individual

Teacher – Ss

Whole class
Teamwork

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

+ Open pairs :

Ask Ss to work in pairs to demonstrate the dialogue
+ Closed pairs :

Ask Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information using
the tables .

- Monitor and correct .
Where shall we stay ?
Where should we visit ?

What time should we
leave Los Angles ?

The Revere Hotel is
expensive but it is has a
gym.

I think we should visit
Havard Medical School ,
the Museum and Arts
Gallery .

There is a daily flight at
10 am , would that be
ok ?

3 / Post – speaking : Transformation :

- Ask Ss to make a plan for their coming summer holiday
by filling the information in their itinerary .

Ex :

Depart ( Ha Noi ) : ………

Arrive ( Hue ) : ………..

Accommodation : ………

Sightseeing : ………..

Depart ( Hue ) : ………

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate their plans for the
class .

- Give feedback and correct
III/ Listen

1 / Pre – listening : Introduce the topic of the lesson and
some new words to Ss

*. Brainstorm :

- Write the topic on the board .

- ask Ss to find the words related to the topic . Collect Ss
words and write them on the board .

Suggested answers :

Cloudy , cool , cold , warm , hot , dry , fine , humid ,

rainy , snowy , sunny , wet , windy , stormy , degree ,
minus ….

- Go through the meaning of the words and have Ss copy .
**. Chatting :

- Ask Ss some questions to lead in the lesson .

a) Have you ever listened to the weather forecast on TV or
on the radio ?

b) What does it often tell you about ?

c) Do you think it is necessary to listen to the weather
forecast ? Why / Why not ?

d) What do you know about the high and the low
temperature ? ( It refers to the lowest and highest

Teacher – Ss

Pair work

Pair work
Remember and
complete

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

temperature degrees in a day ? )

2 / While listening : Gap fill
- Put the gap – fill table on the board .
- Have Ss copy in their notebooks .

City Weather Low High

1. Sydney dry , windy 20 26

2. Tokyo dry , windy 15 22

3. London Humid , cold -3 7

4. Bangkok Warm , dry 24 32

5. New York Windy , cloudy 8 15

6. Paris Cool , dry 10 16

- Tell Ss they are going to listen to the weather forecast
about the cities in the tables and have to fill in the gaps
with the information they hear .

- Play the tape 3 times

- Tell Ss to work in pairs to compare their answers .
- Get Ss to give their answers and correct .

- Have Ss copy the answer ( Bold words and numbers in
the table above )

3 / Post - listening : Role - play

- Have Ss ask and answer the questions about the weather
and temperature using the information in the table .

Example :

A : What is the weather like in Sydney today ?
B : It will be dry and windy .

A : How about the temperature ?

B : The low will be 20 and the high 26 degrees .
- Get the whole class to practice speaking , using the
information in the table .

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges before
the class .

V / Home work :

1. Write your itinerary into your notebooks .
2. Do the exercise in the workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

Period 74 Preparing day: 18/02/2010
Unit 12

A Vacation abroad
Lesson 3 : read

A /Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss can obtain some knowledge
about some scene sports in the USA .

B / Teaching aids : Postcards , cardboards , pictures , drawing …
D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually

E/ Procedure :

I / Warm up : Pelmanism

- Using 11 cardboards numbered from 1 to 11 on one side
and the words on the other side .

Adjectives Nouns

Humid Humidity

Warm Warmth

Windy Wind

Dry Dryness

Cloudy Cloud

Coolness

II/ Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .

1. Pre –teach vocabulary :
- volcano ( using picture )
- lava (nu ) ( picture )
- to pour out ( picture )
- to carve ( mime )
- to be situated : nam o

- overhead ( adv ) = above your head
=> Get Ss to copy down the vocabulary
* Checking vocabulary : What and where
III / While - reading : Grid

- Draw the grid on the board .

- Ask Ss to copy the grid in their notebooks .

Place What she did and saw

a. Hawaii
b. New York
c. Chicago

d. Mount Rushmore
e. San Francisco

Went swimming ,

Visited Kilauea
Volcano …

- Ask Ss to read the postcards from Mrs Quyen to her
children and fill in the gaps with the information taken
from them .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the
information in the grid on the board .

- Give feedback and correct .

Place What she did and saw

a. Hawaii
b. New York
c. Chicago

d. Mount Rushmore
e. San Francisco

Went swimming ,visited
Kilauea Volcano .

Went shopping , bought lots
of souvenirs .

Saw lake Michigan
Saw the heads of 4
American Presidents

Team work

Teacher – Ss

Teacher – the whole
class

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

Visited Fisherman,_{swharf ,}
the NaPa Valley wine –
growing area and the
Alcatraz Prison
IV / Post - reading :

Answer the following questions :
- Ask ss to look at the questions and answer the
questions .

- Tell them to compare their answers with their partners .
- Call on some pairs to give their answers and give
feedback .

a) she went there by plane

b) She saw the famous prison on the island of Alcatraz.
c) It is the mount where the heads of four American
Presidents are carved into the rock , and it can be from
more than 100 km away .

d) It is also called “ The Windy City “
e) She went shopping .

V / Homework :

1. Write the answers into their notebooks .
2. Do the exercise in the workbook .

Pair work
Teacher – Ss

Remember and
complete

Ngµy 01/ 03/ 2010

WEEK 28

Period 75 Preparing day: 25/02/2010
Unit 12

A Vacation abroad
Lesson 4 :write

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write postcards to
their friends about their trip .

B/ Language content

lava, volcano, carve
C/ Teaching aids : Chart , drawing

D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E/ Procedure :

I / Warm up : Lucky numbers
Questions

1. Where did Mrs Quyen and her husband spend their
holiday ?

( In the USA )
2. Lucky number

3. What did they see on Mount Rushmore ?

( The heads of 4 American Presidents carved into the

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

rock )

4. Who did they visit when they were in the USA ?
( The Smiths )

5. Lucky number

6. What did Mrs Quyen do while her husband was visiting

the Statue of Liberty ?

( She went shopping )
7. Lucky number

8. What did Mrs Quyen buy ?
( Lots of souvenirs )

9. What did she send to her children from the USA ?
( Postcards )

10 . Lucky number

- Remark and correct the results => lead in the new
lesson .

II / Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and
some new words to students .

1. Gap – fill : Set the scene “ from the USA , Mrs Quyen
sent a postcard to her friend Sally to tell her about the trip “
- Ask Ss to look at the postcard and complete the gaps with
the appropriate words .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the words
they guess

- Give feedback and correct .

1. in 2. people 3. weather 4. visited 5. her

6. nice 7. bought 8. for 9 heaviness 10 . soon
2. Grid

- write the topic on the board .

* Information needed to write a postcard .
- Ask Ss to look at part 2

- Go through the instructions by using questions :
+ What do you write about the place ?

+ What do you write about the weather ?
- Draw the grid on the board .

- Let Ss copy the grid .

- Ask Ss to read the postcard again and fill the gaps with
the sentences showing the information on the left .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write their answers
in the grid .

- Give feedback and correct
Necessary information for
a postcard

Place We are having a wonderful

time in the USA
How you feel about the

people The people are friendly

Weather The weather has been

warm and sunny

Who you meet / visit In San Fransico , I visited
my friend , Sandra Smith .

What you see No information

What you see I bought lots of souvenirs
- Ask Ss to write the grid in their notebooks

III / While -writing :

1. Set the scene “ Imagine you are a tourist on vacation in a

Teacher
Pair work

Whole class

Individual
Teacher

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

certain place / city in Viet Nam . Write a postcard to a

friend about your trip , using the information in the grid “
2. Writing :

- Tell Ss to write the postcard on a piece of paper
- Monitor and assist Ss with their writing .

- Collect some writings and correct

- Ask some Ss to read their writings in front of class .
IV / Post - writing : Exhibition

- Call on some Ss to the front of class and ask them to read
their postcards to the whole class .

- Give feedback and correct
Present progressive

Form : is / am / are + always + verb - ing
Use : to express a complaint

- Have Ss copy
b) Practice Drill :

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures .

- Model the first picture and have Ss repeat .
- Ask Ss to work through the rest of the pictures .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board to write the sentences .
Test 15 minutes

<i>Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets , past </i>
<i>progressive or simple past . </i>

1. She ( practice ) her piano lesson at 7 o,_{clock last night .}
2. They ( buy ) some new books on Math yesterday .
3. I ( send ) my friend a parcel yesterday .

4. When the postman ( vome ) , We ( be ) in the garden and
( plant ) some flowers .

V / Homework :

1. Write your postcard in your notebook .
2. Do the exercises in the workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Individual

Individual
Teacher

Choral -> Individual

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

Preparing day: 25/02/2010
Period 76 Unit 12

A Vacation abroad

Lesson5: Language focus
A/ THE AIMS:

Students will be able to talk about activities using Present and Past progressive tenses
B/ LANGUAGE CONTENT :

<i>I/ Vocabulary : </i>

<i>II/ Grammar : </i> Present and past progressive tenses
C/ TEACHING AIDS : pictures , cardboards

D/ METHOD :

Communitive approach
E/ PROCEDURES :

<i>Teacher s activities</i>’
<i>I/ Warm up : </i>
* Memory game :

- Divide the class into 2 parts

- Ask the first S in on group to say a
simple sentence

- Ask the first S in on the other group
repeat the previous sentence and add one new

sentence of his/ her own

- Go on untill the last S can not repeat the
whole sentence and his/ her team loses the
game .

II/ Revision and Practice
1. Revision

a) The past continuous tense
+ Form: S + was/ were + V-ing.

+ Use: to indicate an action that was in
progressive tense at a point of time in the past.

<i>students activities</i>’

Divide the class into two
groups

2. Revision

b) The past continuous tense
+ Form: S + was/ were + V-ing.

+ Use: to indicate an action that was in
progressive tense at a point of time in the past.
c) The past continuous with “when” and

“while”.

+ Form:

Main clause Conjunction Adv clause
Past continuous When -Past simple

Past simple While -Past

continuous

+ Use: An action was taking place in the past
when another action took place.

d) Present continuous with “always”.
+ Form: S + is/am are + V-ing

+Use:The present continuous tense with
“always” is used to express a complaint.

3. Practice
*Exercise 1

- Make an example
Ba was taking a shower at
8 o’clock last night.

-Look at the pictures.
-Listen and number the
pictures.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

-Ask students to look at the pictures on page
119 carefully.

-Tell students to listen and number the
pictures

-Read the verbs aloud.

1. walk with a dog 4.talk to gramma
2. eat dinner 5.read a comic
3.take a shower 6.write a letter

-Call on some students to give their answers.
a) 3 b) 2 c)5 d) 6 e) 1 f) 4
- Show the cardboard and through the verbs.
1. ba / take a shower.

2. Hoa / have dinner.
3. Bao / read a comic.
4. Nga/ write a letter.
5. Na /walk wih a dog.

6. Lan and her grandma/ talk to each other.
- Model the first sentence and have students
repeat.

*Exercise 2

-Ask students to look at the pictures on

page 119 and do the maching on page 120.
- Call on some students to give their answers
Answer:

a) C b) F c) E d)B e) D f) A

-Repeat.

-Look at the picture on page
120.

- Give the answer.

-Put the photocopied pictures on the board in
the order of the word cues.

- Model the first sentence and have students
repeat.

The Le family was sleeping when the mailman
came.

-Ask students to work through the rest of the
cue.

Picture a) The Le family/ sleep
b) Hoa / eat

c) Nam/ win the race
d) Mrs Thoa/ cook.

e) Lan / arrive at school.
f) It/ rain.

* Exercise 3

Remind the Progressive tense
+ Form: S + is/am/ are +V-ing

- Ask studens to look at the pictures, model the
first picture and have students repeat.

III/ Further practice

Exercise: Choose the best answer

1. What you yesterday?
a. were/ doing b. did/ do

2. you dishes at 7 p.m last
Tuesday?

a. were/ washing did/ wash

3.She in the factory when she an

exposion.

a.worked/ heard b. was

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

working/heard

4. He laws when the war .

a. was studying/ occurred
b. was studying/ was occurring

5. They soundly while the factory
a. was sleeping/ was burning

b. were sleeping/ burned.
IV/ Consolidation

-Remind the past progressive tense

- Remind the present progressive tense with
“always”.

V/ Homework

Write complete sentences in the notebooks
(1,2,3 ).

Period 77 Preparing day: 25 /03/2010
Unit 13 : Festivals

Lesson 1: Getting started

Listen and read

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask for explanations
of events .

B / Language content
a) Grammar

Compound adjectives
a rice-cooking festival

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

b) Vocabulary

Rub, husk, yell = to shout loudly, participate = to take part in, award, fire making,
rice-cooking festival, water-feching cotest, starting position.

C / Teaching aids : Posters , cassette ..

D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Getting started ( Chatting )
- Write the names on the board : Tom , David ,
Hucklebery , Oliver , Robinson

- Tell Ss these people are going to to go on their visits to
Viet Nam and they need advice on where to go .

- Introdice the names , one by one
1. Tom likes swimming and sunbathing
Where should he go ? …. Why …?
2. David is interested in ancient cities ?
3. Hucklebery likes mountain – climbing ?
4. Oliver is keen on pottery ?

5. Robinson is fond of crowed places ?
=> Lead in the new lesson .

II / Presentation :Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .

* Pre teach vocabulary :

- To fetch = to go to get sth and bring it back .
- to yell = to shout loudly

- to urge = to make a person / an animal move more
quickly

- to rub ( mine )

- to participate = to take part in sth
- to award so / st = to award sth to so .
=> Have Ss copy

* Checking vocabulary : What and where
* Open prediction :

- Set the scene “ Ba invites his friend Liz to a traditional
festival in the North of Viet Nam . Do you know what
kind of festival it is ? ( It is the rice – cooking festival )
“

- Get Ss to guess what they are going to read bu asking
questions then write students,_{answers on the board .}
* Suggestions :

+ How many competitions do people enter in a rice –
cooking festival ?

+ In water – festival competition , what do people do ?
How about a fire – making competition ? A rice –
cooking competition ?

Rice – cooking festival

( Water fetching ) ( fire – making ) ( rice –
cooking )

to fetch water to make a fire to cook rice
III / Practice

- Ask Ss to open their books , read the dialogue and listen
to the tape .

- Play the tape .

- Check if students,_{guesses are correct or not .}

Individual

Teacher – Ss

Whole class
Teacher – Ss
Individual
Teacher – Ss

Whole class

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

*. True or false

- Ask Ss to read the statements and check the boxes ,
using the information in the dialogue .

- Get Ss to give their answers and correct the sentences .
- Have Ss copy down.

* Answer Key :

a) False -> Only one team member takes part in the water
– fetching contest .

b) False -> One person has to collect one water bottle .
c) True

d) False -> Pieces of bamboo are used to make the fire .
e) False -> In the final contest , the judges taste the rice .
f) True

* Practice the dialogue in pairs .
IV / Consolidation :

 Grammar Drill : Compound Adjectives
- Write the models on the board .

A rice – cooking Festival
A water – fetching Competition
A fire – matching

(article ) ( noun ) ( Verb- ing ) ( noun )

Compound adjectives
Use : to form a compound adjective
Form : noun + Verb- ing

- Have Ss copy .
* Practice :

- Rewrite the sentences . Use a compound word in your
sentences .

1. It is contest in which participants have to cook rice .
=> It is a rice – cooking contest .

2. It is a festival in which people have their bulls fight
against each other .

=>

3. Viet Nam is a country which exports a lot of rice .
=>

4. This is machine which is used to wash clothes .
=>

- Ask Ss to complete the sentences in group work
- Call on some pairs to practice in front of class .
- Have Ss copy in their notebooks .

V / Homework :

1. Copy the completed sentences in their notebooks .
2. Learn by heart the new words ,and write two lines for
each word .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Whole class

Pair work
Teacher – Ss

Group work of 4/5

teams

Demonstrate in front
of class .

Individual .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

WEEK 29 Preparing: 06/03/2010

Unit 13 : Festivals
Period 78 Lesson 2: Speak + Listen

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about their
preparations for a special event .

B/ Language content

Students will be able to use words and words phrases: tidy, peach blossoms, a bunch of
flowers, marigold, dried wartermelon seeds, spring rolls.

C / Teaching aids : Chart , cassette ..

D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Slap the board

+ fetch / yell / urge / rub / participation / award / upset /
festival

II / Speak :

1)Pre-speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking and
some new words to students

* Pre – teach vocabulary :

- Pomegranate (n) : qua luu , cay luu ;-Peach blossoms
(n)

- Marigolds

- Dried watermelon seeds
- Spring roll

=> Have Ss copy .

* Checking vocabulary : Bingo

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and put the sentences in the
correct order .

- Call on some pairs to give their answers
- Give feedback and correct .

A-> F B-> G C-> H D -> J E -> I
2. While - speaking :

- Ask ss to close their books .

- Put the chart with the cues on the board .
- Elicit the exchanges from Ss .

- Have some pairs practices each exchange before going
on to another exchange .

- After finishing the dialogue , call on a pair to
demonstrate the whole dialogue .

+ Open pairs : Call on some pairs to demonstrate the
whole dialogue .

+ Closed pairs : Have the whole class work in pairs .
- Monitor and correct mistakes if any .

Mrs Quyen
A : You / tidied /
bedroom ?

Lan

1. yes / where / going /

Whole class

Teacher

Teacher – Ss

Individual
Pair work

Teacher – Ss

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

B: market / have to /
oranges / pomegranates
C : sure / will

D : not really / but / want
house / look nice / festival.
E : That / very good / Bye

2. Could / collect / new Ao
Dai tailor / corner / ?
3. Thanks / anything /
want / me / do / while / out
?

4. mom / I / what / do now
/will / clean / glass

windows
5. Bye /

3. Post - speaking :

- Ask ss to choose one of the festivals and make up their
own dialogues .

- Monitor and assist Ss while they are working .

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate their dialogues for the
class . - Give feedback and correct .

III/ Listening :
1. Pre -listening :

- Set the scene “ The Robinson family is making

preparations for Tet . They want to buy things to make it
a traditional festival as Vietnamese people . “

- Ask Ss to open their books and read the statements .
- Get them to predict the words in the gaps and write their
predictions on the board .

2. While - listening :
- Play the tape 3 times

- Ask Ss to listen and fill in the gaps .

- Call on some Ss to give their answers and check is they
are right or not .

- Play the tape again and correct .
=> Answers :

a. Mr Robinson / Flower market
b.Traditional

c. Dried watermelon seeds
d. Make spring rolls.

3.Post - listening :

- Ask ss to copy the grid in their notebooks and fill in the
gaps with the information taken from the statements
above .

- Call on some Ss to give their answers .
Things to do

Mr Robinson - Go to the flower market to buy
peach blossom and a bunch of
marigolds .

Mrs Robinson - Go to Mrs . Nga,_{s to learn how}
to make spring rolls .

Liz - Go to the market to buy candies
and a packet of dried watermelon
seeds .

 Homework :

1. Write your own dialogue in your notebooks .
2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Pair work

Teacher

Individual

Pair work
Individual

Period 79 Preparing day: 08 /03/2009
Unit 13 : Festivals

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get some knowledge
about Christmas .

B / Language content

The Christmas tree, The Christmas card, Christmas Carols, Santa Clause.
C / Teaching aids : Chart , cassette , cardboard , poster …

D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Sing a song

- Teach Ss an English Christmas song . ( Merry Christmas )
- Ask ss to listen to the tape and sing along .

II / Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage
reading and some new words to students .

1. Pre – teach vocabulary :

- to spread : to cover a larger and larger area .
=> to spread – spread – spread

- Christmas carol ( n)

Ex : Silent night is a Christmas carol
- Patron saint ( n) Translation

- Jolly (adj ) = happy and cheerful

- To decorate = to make something look more attractive by
putting things on it

-> Have Ss copy

* Checking vocabulary : Jumbled words
a. tansaaucls b. yljol c. locra d. pdsear

e. codraete f. ontrpatsian

2. Matching :

- Stick the pictures on the board ( Christmas tree / card /
carol / Santa Claus )

1. It has been said he was the patron
saint of children , fat jolly man who
wore a red suit and gave children
presents on Christmas Eve .

a. Christmas
Carol
2. The custom of decorating it and

putting it in a common place , spread
throughout Europe to America .

b. Christmas
card
3. They were stories put to music and

enjoyed by most people . First the
leaders of the Church did not like them
but later they became popular.

c. Santa Claus

4. An English man had someone design

it to send Christmas greetings to his
friends . Now it is a part of the
Christmas tradition .

d. Christmas
tree
- Ask ss to work in pairs to predict and write their
predictions on the board .

III / While - reading :

- Ask Ss to open their books and read the paragraphs and
check their predictions .

Answer key :

1.c 2. d 3. a 4. b
Grid

- Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it .
- Ask Ss to read the paragraph again and complete the
grid .

- Call on some Ss to fill in the gaps in the grid on the board

Whole class

Teacher – Ss

Whole class

Team work

Pair work

Individual

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

.

- Give feedback and correct .
- Get Ss to copy the grid .

<i>Christmas Special</i> <i>Place of origin</i> <i>Date</i>

The Christmas Tree Riga Early 15000s

The Christmas card England Mid-19 th
century
Christmas Carol No information 800 years

ago

Santa Claus USA 1823

IV / Post - reading : Comprehension questions
( Lucky number )

1. More than a century ago .

2. He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends .

3. Lucky number

4. 800 years ago
5. Lucky number

6. An American professor named Clement Clarke Moore
7. Lucky number

8. On the description of Saint Nicholas in professor
Moore,_{s poem .}

9. Lucky number

- Remark and call some Ss to read all the answers , then
write them in their notebooks .

V / Homework :

1 Write the brief paragraphs , using the information in the
grid 2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Group work

Individual
Individual

Preparing day: 08/3/2010
Period 80

Unit 13 : Festivals
Lesson 4: write

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice in writing a
report on festival they have joined .

B / Language content

rice-cooking, water-fetching
C / Teaching aids : Picture , chart …

D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Memory game

- Show the picture to Ss and ask them to observe it
carefully

- Let ss look at the picture for about 20 seconds , then put
it away .

- Divide the class into 2 teams

- Ask ss to go to the board and write their answers .
- Have Ss listen to the questions :

1. How many people are there in the picture ?
What are they doing ?

( They are participating in the rice – cooking

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

competition )

2. Name all the things in the picture .
- Put the picture on the board again .,

( rice , basket , pans , bamboo sticks , paper fans ,
chopsticks , a flag )

=> Give feedback and correct .
II / Pre - writing :

1./ Lucky number :

- Divide the class into 2 teams

1. What do you call the festival where people have to
cook rice? ( the rice cooking festival )

2. How many competitions are there in the rice –cooking
festival ? What are they ? ( three / water – fetching , fire

– making and rice – cooking )

3. Lucky number

4. What do people use to fetch water ? ( bottles )
5. Lucky number

6. Do they use pieces of wood to make fire ?
( No . pieces of bamboo )

7. What do people have to do before they cook the rice ?
( separate the rice from the husk )

8. Lucky number

9. How many people are there altogether in a team taking
part in the rice – cooking festival ?

( Nine / one for water- fetching , two for fire- making and
six for rice – cooking )

III / While - writing :
1. Gap fill

- Ask ss to use the information in the dialogue ( 121 ) to
fill in the report ( 127 )

- Have Ss write their answers on a piece of paper .

- Tell Ss the first 5 or 10 pairs with the right answers will

get 1 or 2 good marks .

- Collect students,_{papers and correct .}
=> Answer key :

1. Rice – cooking 2. one / a 3. water – fetching
4. Run 5. water 6. traditional

7. bamboo 8. six 9. separate 10 .
added

2. Questions and answers :

- Ask ss to write a similar report on a festival they have
joined recently .

- Get ss to practice speaking first by answering the
questions from a -> g .

- Have ss connect the sentences to make it a report .
- Monitor and help Ss with their work .

IV / Post- writing :

- Call on some Ss to read their reports aloud
- Write the report in their notebooks

V / Homework :

1. Copy down their report in their notebooks .

2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Team work

Pair work

Individual

Teacher
Teacher – Ss

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

Ngµy 15/ 03/ 2010

WEEK 30 Preparing day:16/3/2010
Period 81 UNIT 13: FESTIVALS

Lesson 5 : Language focus

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use reported speech
and the passive in the past present and future tenses .

B / Language content

Students will be able to use reported speechand the passivein the past, present and future
tense.

C / Teaching aids : Chart , cardboard ...

D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up :

Pelmanism : Infinitive - past participle
- Divide the class into 2 teams

Infinitive Past participle
- Put

- Write
- Hold
- Make
- Break

Put
Written
Held
Made
Broken
II / Revision and Practice

1. Language 1

- Ask ss to match the words in Column A with the
forms in Column B : The Passive Form

Column A Column B

Tenses Form

1. Present Simple
2. Past Simple
3. Future Simple
4. Present Perfect

a. Was / were + PII
b. Have / has been + PII
c. is / am / are +PII
d. Will / shall be + PII
- Call Ss to give their answers and give

feedback .

- Have them copy

1. c 2.a 3.d 4.b
.* Practice : Gap fill

- Ask Ss to look at LF 1 / 128

- Get them to fill in the gaps with the right form of
the verbs in the box .

- Call on some Ss to got to the board and write their
answers .

- For each sentences , Ss should be asked why they
decided to use that verb form .

* Answer key :

Team work

Pair work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

a. were performed b. was decorated c. Is
made d. will be held e.
was awarded f. was written

2. Language focus 2
a). Revision :

* Pre –teach vocabulary :
- to jumble ( translation )

- to scatter : to throw things everywhere on the
ground

- a jar : ( realia )
=> Get Ss to copy .
b). Practice : Gap fill

- Ask Ss to look at LF 2 / 128 -129 and fill in the

gaps with the right form of the verbs in the box .
- Call Ss to go to the board and write their answers .
- For each sentence , Ss should be asked why they
decided to use that verb form .

Answer key :

1. Jumbled 2. broken 3. broken 4. scattered 5.
pulled

3. / Language focus 3
a)Revision

* Compound Adjectives

- Elicit the examples and write them on the board .
Example :

A rice – cooking Festival
A Water – fetching Competition
( article + noun + verb- ing + noun )

 To form a compound adjective
 Noun + Verb-ing

b). Practice :

- Deliver poster to students .

- Ask ss to do the exercise / 130 and write their

answers on the posters .

- Have them put their poster on the board .
- Give feedback and correct .

* Answer key:

a) A fire – making contest
b) A bull – fighting festival
c) A car – making country
d) A flower – arranging contest
e) A rice – exporting country
f) A clothes – washing machine
4 / Language focus 4

a). Revision :

* Pre- teach : Set the scene “ Yesterday ,

Lan,_{grandmother , Mrs Thu , needed a plumber . A}
man came to her door and said , “ I am plumber “
- Write the quoted speech on the board :

He said , “ I am a plumber “

- Ask ss to report what the man said and write it on
the board .

* Model sentences : Reported speech
He said he was a plumber

- Have ss pay attention to the changes in
1. Tenses

Quoted speech Reported speech

Whole class

Teacher – Ss

Whole class

Group work of 4/5
teams

Teacher – Ss

Teacher

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

- Present simple -> Past simple
- Will -> Would
- Must -> Had to
2. Pronouns :

( depending on the subject of the main clause )
3. Adverb of place and time

This -> That / Now ->

then

Here - > there / Today ->
that day

Tomorrow - > the next day / Yesterday
->the day before / Ago ->
before

4. Spelling

- Have ss copy in their notebooks
b). Practice :

- Ask ss to look at LF 4 / 130 and do the exercise
first , then ask them to write down .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the
sentences .

- Give feedback

b) He said he could fix the faucets
c) he said the pipes were broken .

d) He said new pipes were very expensive .
e) He said Mrs Thu had to pay him then .
III/ Further practice

Ask students to do exercise: Change the sentences

into reported speech.

1.He said,”I’m a student.”

2.They said,”We are learning English now.”
3.Tom said ,”My friend is coming next week.”
4.We said,”We shall overcome this difficulty.”
5.She said,”I can’t find my umbrella.”

IV/ Consolidation
*Remind the structures
- Passive forms

-Reported speech.

Test 15 minutes

<i>Change these sentences into the passive voice : </i>
1. She bought some new clothes for her children .
2. Ba can fix the bike by himself .

3. They did not use matches to make the fire .
4. The librarian will show you how to find a book .
5. They make paper in this factory .

V/ Home work :

1. Get Ss to copy down all the exercises in their
notebooks

2. Do the exercises in the workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Whole class

Individual
- Do exercise

1.He said that he was a
student.

2.They said that they
were learning English
then.

3.Tom said that his
friend was coming next
week.

4.We said that we
should overcomethat
difficulty.

5.She said that she
couldn’t find her
umbrella.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

Preparing day:16/3/2010

Period 82 Unit 14

Wonders of the world
Lesson 1 : Getting started

Listen and read

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to seek information
about a language game to complete a summary .

B/ Language content

Names of some Wonders of the world: ThePyramids, Sydney Opera house, Statue of
Liberty, The Golden Gate Bridge.

C / Teaching aids : Pictures , postcards , cassette , chart ..
D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Quiz

- Prepare some postcards or pictures of the famous world
landmarks or scene spots in Viet Nam .

- Show the pictures , one by one , to Ss and ask them what
place it is .

- Divide the class into 2 reams , the team able to answer the
question will get 1 point .

- Give Ss some questions to help them easily recognize the
place .

Suggestions :

1. It is a place in the Central Viet Nam with cold weather
of the year …

2. Getting started

- Inform the topic : Wonders of the world

- Have Ss look at the pictures / 131 and do the matching

Team work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

.

- Check if they know where country these wonders are
a) The Pyramid

b) Sydney Opera House
c) Stone Henge

II / Presentation : Introduce the passage reading and some
new words to students .

* Ordering :

- Set the scene “ Nga , Nhi and Hoa are playing a
language game called guessing game . How does this
game work ? Rearrange the statements in the right
order of the game . “

- Put the statements chart on the board .

- Ask ss to read the statements and put them in the right
order .

* How to play the guessing game :

1. B asks questions to find out who or what is .
2. A thinks of a famous person or place .

3. B wins if he / she can guess the correct answer.
4. A gives B a clue .

5. B loses if he / she can not guess the correct answer .
6. A can only answer “ yes “ or “ no “

III / Practice :

- Call on some pairs to go to the board and write their
answers .

- Ask ss to open their books and read the dialogue while
listening to the tape .

- Check if Ss,_{guesses are right or not .}

- Have Ss copy the statements in the right order .
Answer key :

1. thinks of ………..

4 …………

1. …………..

1. …………

2. ………….

3. …………..
 Gap fill :

- Have Ss read the dialogue again and complete the summary
(2) / 132 .

- Ask Ss to compare their answers with their partners .
- Have some Ss give their answers .

Answer key :

1. Game 2. Place 3. Clue 4. Vietnam
5. America 6. Golden 7. Right 8. Was

* Grammar Awareness

- Elicit the target language by asking Ss a question ( in
Vietnamese )

* Model sentences :

I do not know how to play it
S V Question word to - infinitive
Concept checking :

Form : S + V + Question word + To – infinitive …
Use : Reduced form of an indirect question .

Example : I do not know how I can play it .
how to play it .

Please tell me where I can go during the visit

Pair work

Whole class

Whole class
Pair work

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

Where to go
IV / Consolidation :

 Matching :

- Ask Ss to read the summary again .
- Write the words on the board .

- Get Ss to match the words in Column A with their
explanations in Column B .

A B

1. Suggest (v)
2. Golden ( adj )
3. Clue (n)
4. Bored (adj)

a. a piece of information
that helps you discover the
answer to a question .

b. What you often feel when
you have nothing to do .
c. made of gold

d. make a suggestion .
- Ask some ss to give their answers

* Answer key :

<i>1.d 2.c 3.a 4. b</i>

V / Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words and write two lines for each one
.

2. Do the exercises in the workbook .
3. Prepare the next lesson .

Individual

Individual
Remember and
complete

Preparing day: 16/ 3 / 2010
Period 83 Unit 14

Wonders of the world
Lesson 2 : Speak + LISTEN

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make a report on
famous places using reported speech . Practice in asking ans answering questions about
places and how to report them .

B / Language content

Indirect speech with “ Yes/ No questions”
C / Teaching aids : Chart , posters..

D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Who is the fastest ?
- Inform the topic and time limit .

+ Write 10.15 famous world places within 3 minutes .
- Deliver posters to Ss .

- Tell ss to put their posters on the board .
- Give feedback and correct .

II/ Speak

1 / Pre - speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking to
students .

- Put the chart with the statements on the board .
- Ask Ss to read the statements and the names of the
famous places in the box / 133 and do the matching .
1./ It was designed and built by the French civil engineer
with 300 meters in height .

2./ It is in South Central Asia , 8,848 meters high above sea
level .

3./ It was built from 246 – 209 BC and some people say it

can be seen from the moon .

4./ It is a bell striking the hours in the clock tower of the
Houses of Parliament in London .

5./ It is a sky craper in Manhattan , new York City .

6./ It is a famous place in Quang Binh Province recognized
as a world Heritage Site by UNESSCO .

* Ask Ss to guess their answers and write them on the
board .

2 / While - speaking :

* Check if Ss understand the statements .
- Call on some pairs to give their answers .
- Give feedback and correct .

1. Effel Tower 2. Mount Everest
3. Great Wall of China

4. Big Ben

5. Empire State building
6. Phong Nha Cave

**. Questions and Answer Drill :

- Ask Ss to write yes/ no questions about 10 places in the

box , using the information in the matching .

1. Have they just the Eiffel Tower in Paris ?

2. Is the Empire State building located in New York City ?
3. Are the Petronas Twin Towers located in Malaysia ?
4. Is the Great Barrier Reef in Australia ?

5. Have you ever seen Mount Rushmore ?
6. Is Mount Everest in Nepal ?

- Monitor and help Ss

- Get Ss to ask and answer the questions , check yes / no .
- Call on a group to demonstrate their work .

***. Grammar Drill

Groupwork of 4/5
Students

Pairwork

Group of 10 students

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

- Set the scene :

* Ask a student : ( Lan / … )

T : Is Hue Citadel in the Central Vietnam ?
S : Yes , it is .

- Ask Ss to listen :

T : I asked Lan if Hue Citadel was in the Central Vietnam
. She said ( that ) it was .

- Write the statement on the board
* Model sentences :

I said to Lan , “ Is Hue Citadel in the Central Vietnam ? “
=> I asked Lan If / Whether Hue was in the Central
Vietnam

Form : Indirect Yes / No question
S + V + ( O ) If / whether S + V …
Use : - to say -> to ask / want to know .

If the verb in the main clause is in past tense , the tense in
the indirect questions must be changed :

Present Simple -> Past Simple
Past Simple - > Past Perfect
Present Perfect -> Past perfect

+ Get Ss to copy in their notebooks .
3 / Post - speaking :

- Choose a group,_{s answer to demonstrate the model}
( asking and reporting )

- Call on a pair in a group to demonstrate the exchanges
and tell one of them to report .

- Have Ss work in their groups .

- Call on Ss in different groups to report in front of the class
.

- Give feedback and correct .

- Ask Ss to report what nhi asked Nga , using reported
speech .

- Call on some Ss to resay the use of th Indirect Yes / No
question if necessary .

- Show the questions on the board
Example :

a) Do you know My Son , Nga ?

-> Nhi asked Nga if / whether she knew My Son .
III/ Listen

1 / Pre- listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and
some new words to students .

* Pre- teach vocabulary :

- Relaxing ( adj ) -> relaxing vacation

- Crystal clear (adj ) = completely clear and bright
- Coral (n) : san ho

- Top snorkel ( picture )
+ Get Ss to copy the vocabulary

 Checking vocabulary : What and where

Whole class
Teacher
Pair work

Group work of 10
Students

Teacher
Individual
Teacher
Teacher – Ss

Whole class

Snorke

l Coral

Crystal
Clear
Relaxing

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

2 / While - listening :

- Set the scene “ You are going to listen an advertisement
on the tape . There are 4 mistakes in the advertisement in
your books . What are they ? “

- Have Ss read the advertisement in their books for few
minutes .

- Ask Ss some questions about the geographical names in
the paragraph .

- Play the tape 3 times .

- Get some Ss to give their answers .

- Play the tape the last time , give feedback and correct .
Answer key :

Look no further than beautiful far north Queensland .
Stay right on the beach at the Coconut Palm Hotel . Take
guided tours through the rainforest , swim in the crystal –
clear water of the Coral Sea and Snorkel amongst the coral
of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park – a world Heritage

Site .

Call ( 007 ) 69243927 for more information
- Ask Ss to read the complete passage aloud ( 2 Ss )
- Correct their mistakes ( pronunciation )

3 / Post - listening :

 True or False ? Correct the false ones

- Ask Ss to read the passage again and do the exercises .
1. Look no farther than beautiful far north Queensland .
2. Stay left on the beach at the Coconut Palm Hotel .
3. Swim in the crystal – dirty water of the Coral Sea .
4. The Great Barrier Marine Park is a world Heritage Site .
5. If you want to know more information , call 6924 3927 .
- Have Ss work in groups . Collect their worksheet and
correct

1. F -> Further
2. F -> Right
3. F -> Clear
4. T

5. T

V / Homework :

1. Write 10 indirect questions of your group in your
notebooks 2. Do the exercises 4,5…. in the work book .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Teacher
Whole class

-Group work

Remember and
complete

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

WEEK 31 Preparing day: 20/03/2010
PERIOd 84 Unit 14

Wonders of the world
LEsson 3 : read

A/ Aims and objectives :

By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get some knowledge about the wonders of the
world . Read for details about the wonders of the world .

B / Language content

* Vocabulary: compile,claim, honor,god,religious,royal,religion...
*Grammar: Passive forms with modal ver

C / Teaching aids : Chart , posters., cassette , pictures , ….
D / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually

E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Hangman

1

2

3

5 6

4

7

8

- Have Ss guess the letters one by one

- For each wrong guess , draw a line from 1 to 8 . Ss lose
the game if they guess wrong 8 times .

Words : Coral , Crystal – clear , Snorkel , Relaxing
 C - O - R - A - L

II / Pre- reading :

Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new

words to Ss .

- to compile ( translation )

- to claim = to say something is true
- to honor = to show respect

- a god (male ) -> goddess ( female )
- religion (n) -> religious (adj )
- royal (adj ) ( situation )

=> Have Ss copy in their notebooks .

* Checking vocabulary : Slap the board

Whole class

Teacher
Teacher – Ss

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

- Put the chart on the board

Statements Guess Read

1. An Egyptian man compiled a list of what
he thought were the seven wonders of the
world .

2. The only surviving wonder is the
Pyramid of Cheeps in Egypt .

3. Today , we can still see the Hanging
Gardens of Babylon in present – day Irag .
4. Angkor Wat was originally built to honor
a Hindu God .

5. The Great wall of china first was not in
the list of the seven wonders of the world .
6. In the early 15th_{century , the Khoner}
King chose Angkor Wat as the new capital .

F
T
F
T
T
F
- Ask Ss to work in groups to decide if the statements are true
or false .

- Collect and write their predictions on the board .
III / While - reading :

- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask Ss to read the text / 134 to
check their predictions .

- Call on some Ss to correct the false statements .
1. False : A Greek man named Antipater did it .

3. False : The only surviving wonder is the pyramid of
Cheops in Egypt .

6. False : In the early 15 th _{century , the Kh},_{mer King chose}
Phnom Penh as the new capital .

* Multiple Choice : Complete the sentences

- Ask Ss to choose the best answers to complete the sentences
.

- Put the answers chart on the board .

- Read the statements aloud and make hand gestures to show
the missing words .

- Have Ss choose A , B , C or D .

- Correct and get Ss write the right answers in their notebooks
.

a) C - the Pyramid of Cheops
b) A - Hindus

c) D - was part of a royal Khmer city a long time ago .
d) B - chose Phnom Penh as the new capital .

IV / Post- reading : Grid

- Ask Ss to read the text again and fill in the grid with the
information taken from the text .

Pair work
Teacher
Teacher
Individual

- Individual
Whole class

Pair work

Whole class

<b>Royal</b> <b>_Honor</b> <b>Compile</b>

<b>Claim</b>

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

Wonders of the world Country

1. Hanging gardens of
Babylon

2
3
4
5

.

………

Irag

………
………

.

………
………
………

- Call on some Ss to give their answers .

- Correct the mistakes , and write the correct answers in their
notebooks .

V / Language focus 1
1. Revision :

- Ask Ss to resay the form of the passive in the past simple
tense

Was / were + PII

- Have Ss look at the exercise and choose the right verbs in

the box for the gaps in the sentences

2. Practice :

- Get Ss to complete the senetnces with the right passive
form of the verbs .

- Call on some Ss to give their anwers .
- Give feedback and correct .

a) was completed b) was constructed c) was designed
d) was presented e) was reached

- Write the words and their meaning on the board .

- Ask Ss to read the exercises again and do the matching .

A B

1. Construct (v)
2. Design (v)
3. Summit (n)
4. Expendition
5. Guide

a) thiÕt kế

b) đoàn thám hiểm
c) xây dựng

d) hng dẫn viên
e) đỉnh ( núi )

- Call on some Ss to go to the board to draw the lines to
connect the words . 1. C 2. A 3. E 4.B 5. D

V / Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words and write two lines for each one
2. Do the exercises in the workbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Individual
Teacher – Ss
Individual

Individual

Pairwork

Individual

Remember and
complete

Preparing day: 20/03/2010

Period 85 Unit 14

Wonders of the world
Lesson 4 : write

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letter to a
friend about a place they have visited .

B / Teaching aids : Drawing , pictures …

C / Teaching method: work in pairs, work in individually
D / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Guessing games
" Wonders of the world "

- Have Ss think of one of the wonders of the world and write it
on a piece of paper .

- Call on a student to the front of the class with his / her
paper .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

- Get the rest of the class ask him / her yes-no questions to
guess the wonder .

- The student having the right guess will take the place of the
last student .

II / Pre- writing : Introduce the topic of writing and some new

words to students .

1. Pre – teach vocabulary :

- a ranger = a person who takes care of a park
- Edge = mep , ria

- a canyon ( translation )

- Breathtaking (adj ) = very exciting , impressive
- Temperate (adj) ( translation )

- Stone Age : thoi ki do da
=> Have Ss copy

* Checking vocabulary : What and where
2. Insertion : Complete the letter

- Ask Ss to read the letter Tim sent to Hoa about his trip to the
grand Canyon / 135

- Tell Ss to complete the letter by inserting the letters of the
missing sentences ( A , B , C and D )

- Call on some Ss to read their completed letters in front of
class.

- Give feedback and correct

1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A

III / While - writing :

- Set the scene “ Imagine you have visited a place recently .
write a letter to a friend of yours and tell him / her about this
place . “

- Hang the board with the outline .

- Ask Ss to write the letter in their notebooks
- Monitor and help Ss if necessary .

- Call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class .
- Collect some Ss, _{writings to correct common mistakes .}
- Give feedback and correct .

Dear Mai ,

I am writing this letter to you that you have just returned
from a trip to Ha long Bay with my family . The sight was
extremely magnificient

It took us five or six hours by car to get there from Hanoi .
We spent more than a week there .

The weather was perfect . It was sunny , cool and windy .
Wee enjoyed walking along the seaside at night very much .
It was really interesting when we knew about the legenda of
Ha Long bay . We really want to come back there when we
have time next year .

How are you getting with your study at home ? Where are
you going for your holiday ? Let me know .

Your friend ,
Lan

- Have some Ss read the complete letter aloud .
IV / Post - writing : Interview

- Ask Ss to use the outline on the board and the information in
their letters to make an interview .

+ Call on a student to stand up to answer the questions :
1. Where have you just visited ?

2. How far is it ?

3. How did you get there ?

Teacher
Teacher – Ss

Whole class
Teacher – Ss

Individual

Teacher
Individual

Individual
Teacher – Ss

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

4. What is it like ? / Is it beautiful ?
5. How about the weather ?

6. How did you feel ?

- Have Ss play in turn the role of an interviewer and
interviewee .

- Monitor and correct .

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate their interview.
V / Homework :

1. Learn by heart new words and write two lines for each one .
2. Rewrite the letter in their notebooks .

3. Do the exercises in their workbooks .
4. Prepare the next lesson .

Individual
Remember and
complete

Preparing day: 20/03/2010

PERIOD 86 Unit 14

Wonders of the world
Lesson 5: Language Focus
A/ Aims

Further practice in reported speech and the passives

Students can report what people ask and answer about one of the world cultural heritage
of Vietnam.

B/ LANGUAGE CONTENT :
<i>I/ Vocabulary : </i>

<i>II/ Grammar : </i> + Reported speech

+ Question word before to inf
+ Verb + To inf

C/ TEACHING AIDS : charts , posters
D/ METHOD : Communitive approach
E/ PROCEDURES :

Teacher’s activities Students’activities

<i>I/ Warm up : </i>
Bingo

- Temperate , breathtaking , royal , religious ,
canyon , pyramid, edge, god , jungle, compile ( 10
words )

II / Revision and practice

-Ask S to resay the form of the passive in the past
simple tense

-Have S look at the exercise and choose the right
verbs in the box for the gaps in the sentences

* Language focus 1

- Get Ss to complete the sentences with the right
passive form of the verbs .

- Call on some Ss to give their anwers .
- Give feedback and correct .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

a) was completed b) was constructed c) was
designed

d) was presented e) was reached
<i>*Language focus 2 : </i>

<i>Set the scene</i>

Yesterday, Nga and Nhi talked about My Son,

one of the world cultural Heritage of VietNam.
Beside answering some of Nhi’s questions.
Nga

Gave her some additional information
about MySon

- Ask S to report what Nhi asked Nga, using
reported speech

- Call on some S to resay the use of the Indirect
Yes/No question

<i> Practice </i>
+ Oral dril

- Call one one S to read the questions another S
read the reported sentence

<i>Production</i> : Writing Drill

Call on some S to go to the board and write the

reported sentences

-Correct and asked Ss to write the right answers
in their notebooks

* Language focus 3 :
+ Production :

- World Cue drill

. Show the word –cue chart on the board
. Modal the first sentence and ask Ss to listen

<i>S + V + Question work + To inf</i>

. Check if S recognize the model sentence
. Ask one S to say the next sentence

. Give feedback

- Writing drill

- Ask some S to go to the board and write

complete sentences

- Give feedback, correct, have S copy

* Language focus 4 :

<i>Presentation</i> :

-Elicit the target language from S
- Get S copy down

Practice :

Ask them to complete the passage on page 138

<i>Model</i> :

a. Do you know My Son,
Nga ?

à Nhi asked Nga If/
whether she knew

a. Nhi asked Nga if she
knew MS

b.Quang Trung province
many people lived at
d.It was far from Hanoi
e. Many torists visited
f.Nga wanted to visit
a. Tell / how / go there

à Nga told Nhi how to go
there

<i>Keys :</i>

b. Nga showed Nhi where
to get …

c. Nga pointed out where to
buy …

d. Nga advised Nhi how to
go ….

1. I want to go out

2. She enjoys swimming
3.He can speek English

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

Call on some S to give their answers

Correct and have a S read the whole paragraph aloud
Production

- Ask Ss to write 6 sentences of their own, using
three forms above

- Monitor and assit if S necessary

- Call on some S to go to the board and write

their answers

III/ Further practice

-Ask the students to do the exercise

Exercise:Change the sentences intoindirect speech
1/ The man said to her,”Can you play the piano?”
2/ The teacher said to the students,” Are you ready
for tomorrow?”

3/ The girl said to the boy,”Do you know the way to
the post office in this city?”

4/ The doctor said to the patient,” Do you feel better
here?”

5/ He said to his mother,” Do you eat potatoes and
rice?”

IV/ Consolidation

Remind indirect qestions with “if” and “whether”,
Question words before to infinitive.

V/ Homework

- Learn your lesson

<i>1. S + V + To inf</i>

<i>2. S + V + V </i>–<i> ing</i>

Use : same use as enjoy :
Start, begin, advise

<i>3. S + V + Bare inf </i>
Use : modal verbs

-Do exercise

1.The man asked her if she
could play the piano.

2.The teacher asked the
students if they were ready
for the following day.

3. The girl asked the boy
whether she knew the way
to the post office in that
city.

4.The doctor asked the
patient if he felt better
there.

5.He asked his mother
whether she ate potatoes
and rice.

Ngµy 29 / 03 / 2010

WEEK 32 Preparing day:25/3/2010

Period 87 revision

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to summarize the basic
knowledge they have learnt in the lessons

B / Teaching aids : Chart , posters., …
C / Procedure :

* Revision :

1 / The Passive Form

Column A Column B

Tenses Form

1. Present Simple
2. Past Simple
3. Future Simple
4. Present Perfect

a. Was / were + PII
b. Have / has been + PII
c. is / am / are +PII
d. Will / shall be + PII

- Call Ss to give their answers and give feedback .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

- Have them copy

2 / Compound words:

( article + noun + verb- ing + noun )
 To form a compound adjective
 Noun + Verb-ing

a) A fire – making contest
b) A bull – fighting festival
c) A car – making country
d) A flower – arranging contest
e) A rice – exporting country
f) A clothes – washing machine
3 / Reported speech

a. Tenses

Quoted speech Reported speech
- Present simple -> Past simple
- Will -> Would
- Must -> Had to
b. Pronouns :

( depending on the subject of the main clause )

c. Adverb of place and time

This -> That / Now -> then
Here - > there / Today -> that day
Tomorrow - > the next day / Yesterday ->the
day before / Ago -> before

4 / The passive forms:

- Ask Ss to resay the form of the passive in the past simple
tense

Was / were + PII

- Have Ss look at the exercise and choose the right verbs in
the box for the gaps in the sentences

*. Practice :

- Get Ss to complete the senetnces with the right passive
form of the verbs .

- Call on some Ss to give their anwers .
- Give feedback and correct .

5 / Question words before to - infinitives
*. Tell / how / go there .

-> Nga told Nhi how to go there .

- Check if Ss recognize the model sentences
=> S + V + Question worh + to – infinitive .
- Have Ss say the next sentence .

- Give feedback and correct .

- Get them to do the rest of the exercise orally with the
same steps .

6 / Verb + to - infinitive

a. I want to go out at weekends.
to – infinitive

b. She enjoys swimming very much .
Verb-ing

c. He can speak many language .
modal bare infinitive

verb
 Notes :

a. Most of the verbs in English are followed by a to
-infinitive .

Pairwork

Individual

Teacher

Individual

Pairwork

Individual
Whole class

Teacher

Individual
Whole class

Individual

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

b. Some verbs are used as enjoyed : start , begin , ....
c. Modals : can , could , will , might , must .

=> Get Ss to copy .
* Homework :

1. Learn by heart all the structures in the lessons and give
some examples with them .

2. Redo the exercises in their notebooks .
3. Do the exercise in the workbook .
4. Ready the test.

Individual
Remember and
complete

Preparing day:25/3/2010
Period 88

Written test 45'
A/ Aims and objectives

Students can summarise the knowledge they have learnt from unit 12 to unit 14 to do
the test well.

B/ TEACHING AIDS
Test paper, chalk.
C/ TEST

I/ Read the passage and answer the questions

Hello! My name is David. I worked for a construction company. I started workingfor this
company in 2004. We build roads, dams bridges and things like that. At the monent my
company is producing a plan for a new motorway. I usually work in the road department,
but this month I am working in the dapartment that build bridges so my whole working
day is different now. I normally spend a lot of time outdoors because I have to go to the
construction sites. But with this new project I spend a lot of time in the workshop. Now I

am testing a model of one of the new bridges. I enjoy it a lot o because I have learned a
lot of new things.

Questions

1. When did David begin working for his construction company?
2.What is his company doing at the moment?

3.Is he working in the road department this month?
4.What is he testing now?

II/ Supply the correct form of the verbs
1. We ( have ) dinner when he came.

2. His doctor advised him ( give ) up ( smoke ).
3. A letter ( write ) by Lan yesterday.

4. Most of the Earth's surface ( cover) by water.
III/ Rewrite the following sentences

1." Do you want to visit Hue?"
I asked Lan

2. " I don't want to go swimming".
Peter said that

3. " Get up early to do morning exercises."
Hung' s father told

4." You should do all homework before going to school."

The teacher said

IV/ Circle the best option A,B,C or D to complete each of the following sentences
1. Vietnam is a rice…………. country.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

2. This is the boy…………. Tim.

A.calling B. calls C. called D. call

3. Do you know how ……….computers.

A. use B. using C.to use D. used

4. When the teacher comes in the class stop………and stand up.

A. talking B. to talk C.talk D. talks

5. Our teacher asked us ………….we liked to go camping in the coming festival.

A.whether if B. if C.What D. if whether

6. Theses houses…………..100 years ago.

A. are built B. built C. were built D. build
7. The fresh air in the countryside is good for our………
A. healthy B. health C.healthful D. healthily
8. My computer hasn't………….. since last week.

A. worked B. work C. working D.works

V/ Listen to the passage about Ba and his sister and then put a tick in the appropriate
sentencefor true or false.

1.Ba is younger than Lan.

2. Lan is shorter than his brother.

3. Both Ba and Lan go to school in the morning.

4. They love listening to pop music and reading novels.

5. They don't like playing chess and going swimming in the summer.
6. Lan doesn't like cooking, doing the shopping on Sundays.

7. Ba likes watching war film on TV.

8. Lan also loves playing soccer in her free time.

Preparing day:25/3/2010
Period 89 correcting the test

A. Objective:

By the end of the lesson. SS will be able to undersand exam and can using all
grammar easy.

B. Procedure:

I.Each correct sentence is 0,5 m:

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

3) No,he isn't ( He's working in the department that build bridges).
4) He is testing a model of one of the new bridges.

II.Each correct sentence is 0,5 m:

1)I asked Lan If she wanted to visit Hue.

2)Peter said that He didn't want to go swimming.

3) An's father told him to get up early to do the morning exercise.
4) Teacher said we should do all homework before going to school.
III.Each correct verb is 0,4 m:

1)We were having dinner when he came.
2)His doctor advised him to give up smoking.
3) A letter was written by Lan yesterday.

4) Most of the Earth's surface is covered by wate.
IV.Each correct word is 0,25 m:

1-C 2-C 3-C 4-A

5-B 6-C 7-B 8-A

V.Each correct sentence is 0,25 m:

1-T 2-T 3-F 4-T

5-F 6-F 7-T 8-F

Tapescript:

Hello! My name's Ba. I'm 13 year sold. I have a sister, Lan. She is 15,but she isn't
as tall as I am. everyday I go to school in the morning, my sister has classes in the
afternoon. like my sister,I love listening to pop music and reading novels in my free time.
We both like playing chess and going swimming in Summer. unlike her, I don't like
cooking, doing the shopping in Sundays. Instead, I like watching films, especially war
films on TV. I also love playing soccer in my spare time.

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=196>

WEEK 33
Preparing day:02/4/2010

Period 90 Unit 15 : Computers
Lesson 1: Getting started

Listen and read

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get Ss to differentiate
facts from opinions through reading , and express their opinions about a problem .

B / Language content

Printer, manual, to connect, under guarantee,plug, socket.
C / Teaching aids : Posters , cassette , realia , chart , pictures ...
D/ METHOD : Communitive approach

E / Procedure
:

I / Warm up : Getting started ( Brainstorming )
- Write the topic on the board .

- Computer can help us : + Save time ...

- Ask Ss to think of the topic and express their opinions .
- Collect Ss ,_{opinions and write them on the board .}
=> Lead in the new lesson .

II / Presentation :

Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new
words to students .

*Preteach vocabulary :
- a printer ( picture )

- a manual = a book coming with a machine teklls you
how to use / operate the machine .

- to connect ( hand guesture )

- under guarantee : The machine you buy at a shop will

be under guarantee from 6 to 12 months .

- a plug ( realia )
- Socket ( realia )
 Have Ss copy .

 Checking vocabualry : Bingo
*True or false prediction

- Set the scene “ Nam and his father , Mr Nhat are talking
about the problem of the computer , they have bought . What
happens to the computer? “

- Put the chart on the board and have Ss guess which
statements are true and which are false .

Statements Guess Rea

d
1. The printer is not working

2. Nam has laready turned the computer on
3. Nam knows how to connect a printer but
he has not connected it properly .

4. The manual helped them to find out the
problem .

5. Mr . Nhat bought the computer in HCM
City and it is still under guarantee .

6. Mr . Nhat thinks the company would not
do anything with his computer because it is

T
T
F
F
T
F

Individual

Teacher
Teacher – Ss

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=197>

too far from his place .

- Call on some pairs to give their answers and write their
guesses on the board .

III/ Practice

1. Check Ss,_{predictions :}

- Ask Ss to open their books , read the dialogue / 138 and
listen to the tape .

- Have ss work in pairs again to check if their guesses are
right or wrong .

- Feedback and correct the false ones :

3. F -> Nam know how to connect s printer and he has
connected it properly .

4. F -> Mr . Nhat thinks it is not very helpful .

6. F -> Mr . Nhat thinks the company should do something
with it .

- Have Ss copy the correct sentences .
2. Reading comprehension :

- Explain the words : “ Fact and Opinion “

+ Fact : a thing that is known to be true , especially when it
can be proved .

+ Opinion : Your feelings or thoughts about someone or
something , raher than a fact .

- Have ss read the statements and check the suitable boxes .
- Call on some Ss to give their answers .

* Answer key :

a) Fact b) Opinion c) Opinion d) Fact e) Fact f) Opinion

- Get Ss to copy .

IV / Consolidation

- Ask Ss to use reported speech to rewrite the dialogue .
- Divide the class into 3 groups and assign each group to
report about 3-4 sentences .

- Have them write their report on a poster and put it on the
board for public check .

V / Home work :

1. Learn by hear new words and write two line for each
word .

2. Do the ex in the workbook and prepare the next lesson .

Teacher – Ss

Whole class
Pairwork
Teacher – Ss

Whole class
Teacher

Individual

Whole class

Group work of 10 /
15 Ss

Individual

Preparing day:02/4/2010
Period 91 Unit 15 : Computers

Lesson 2: Speak + Listen

A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use some common
useful expressions to express agreement and disagrement . Listen for details .

B/ Language content

insert, coin, lemon soda

C / Teaching aids : Posters , chart , pictures ...
D/ METHOD : Communitive approach
E / Procedure :

I / Warm up : Guessing game : “ Do you think that ...? “

- Ask Ss each to think one of the ways comptuers are helpful and
write it on a pice of paper .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=198>

- Get the rest of the class ask him/ her “ Do you think that
computer are ... ?

- The student can only answer with yes or no .

- Tell Ss the one to have the right guess will get one good mark
and go on answering the classmates / questions .

II/ Speak

1 ) Pre-speaking: Introduce the topic of the speaking and
structures to students .

*. Brainstorm :

- Write the topic on the board : Useful expressions to express
agreements and disagreements

- Put the table on the board and elicit students,_{answers then}
write them on the table

Opinion Agreement Degree of

Agreement Disagreement
I like ...

I don,_{t like .}
I think ...
I feel ...

I do not
believe ...

So do I
I agree

You are right
Neither do I

I agree ,
but ....

Yes , but on
the other
hand ...

I disagree
I can not
agree with
you ...
No , I
think ...
- Explain the phrase “ on the other hand “ to Ss .

- Get Ss to copy the table .
**. Matching :

- Put the pictures / 139 on the right of the board and the word
cues on the left ( not in order )

- Have Ss match the words with the pictures .
1. Reading comic books d.
2. Playing in the rain a
3. Driving a car b
4. Foreign food c

- Call on some Ss to go to the board to draw the matching lines
=> Answer key : 1. b 2. c 3. a 4. d

2) While - speaking :

- Erase the words but leave the pictures
* Oral Drill

- Get a student to demonstrate the model (a)
T : I think driving a car is easy

Ss : I disagree . I think it is difficult to drive a car or So do I
- Ask Ss to use the adjectives in the box on page 140 to express
their opinions after going through the meaning of some new
words .

1. entertaining
2. time - consuming
3. challenging
* Suggestions :

a . Driving a car

Learning to drive a car - easy once we get used to it .- Challenging difficult to get

Teacher

Teacher – Ss

Whole class
Individual

Teacher – Ss .

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=199>

used to driving in traffic .
- Dangerous

b. Comic

Reading comic books . - boring - interesting / fun
- time – consuming
c. Foreign food

Humbergers , pizza ,
French fries

- delicious
fun to eat
- unhealthy
d. Playing in the rain - fun

- interesting

- entertaining

- Have Ss use the pictures on the board to practice speaking with
their partners .

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class .
- Give feedback and correct .

3) Post-speaking :
Mapped dialogue

- Present the dialogue and have Ss repeat , sentence by sentence
- Call on one student to demonstrate the dialogue .

+ Open pair

+ Closed pairs : Ss make similar dialogues refering the cues /
140 to replace the information .

III / Listen

1) Pre-listening :

Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words to
students .

* Pre-teach :

- Put the flow chart on the board and have Ss copy it into their
exercises books .

- Get Ss to understand how events are sequenced in a flow chart
and the meanings of all the shapes used in the chart .

Starting / stopping

(Circle )

Questions
( Triangle )

Answers
( Oval )

2) While -listening :
Gap fill

- Ask Ss to look at the flow chart and guess the words in the gaps
.

- Play the tape 3 times and ask ss to listen

- Tell Ss to fill the gaps with the information they have heard

Teacher

Teacher – Ss
Pair work
Teacher
Teacher – Ss

Individual

</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=200>

from the tape .

- Have ss compare the answers with their partners .

- Call on some Ss to go to the board to write their answers .
- Give feedback and correct

Answer key :

a) Do you have

the correct change ? b) Yes
c) What
do you
want to
drink ?

d) Take it Lemon

Soda

- Have Ss copy .

3) / Post -Listening :

Write - it - up

- Have Ss write a set of instructions on how to get a drink from a
machine , using the flow chart .

- Call on some Ss to read their writing for the class .
V/Homework :

1. Write complete dialogues in your notebooks .
2. Do the exercises in the owrkbook .

3. Prepare the next lesson .

Individual

Individual

Remember and
complete

-Listen and write
down.

Find a

machine

</div>

<!--links-->